Mercedes-Benz-CLASE-E 2013 en US

E-Class
Coupe and Cabriolet

Operator's Manual
Symbols i Practical tips or further information that
Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol indicates an
Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X Several of these symbols in
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks succession indicate an instruction
of DOLBY Laboratories. with several steps.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are (Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find more information about a
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
topic.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
Prince.
an instruction that is continued on
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
the next page.
trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
multifunction display/COMAND
Harman International Industries. display.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005
Corporation. The FreeType Project
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights
XM radio Inc. reserved.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Disregarding
them may lead to damage to the vehicle or
personal injury.
Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard
of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
Therefore, descriptions may vary from those
of your own vehicle.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2075844281 É2075844281tËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27
Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 37
Opening/closing ................................. 71
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 105
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119
Climate control ................................. 135
Driving and parking .......................... 149
On-board computer and displays .... 211
Stowage and features ...................... 267
Maintenance and care ...................... 293
Breakdown assistance ..................... 307
Wheels and tires ............................... 321
Technical data ................................... 359

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp .................................. 46
12 V socket Pelvis air bag ................................... 45
see Sockets Safety guidelines ............................. 40
4ETS Side impact air bag .......................... 43
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Window curtain air bag .................... 46
Traction System) AIRCAP
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Cleaning instructions ..................... 302
drive) .................................................. 191 Extending/retracting ....................... 97
4MATIC off-road system ................... 191 Important safety notes .................... 97
Installing/removing the wind
A screen .............................................. 98
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air-conditioning system
Display message ............................ 229 see Climate control
Function/notes ................................ 64 AIRSCARF
Important safety notes .................... 64 Setting the vents ........................... 147
Warning lamp ................................. 258 Switching on/off ........................... 112
Activating/deactivating cooling Air vents
with air dehumidification ................. 140 Glove box ....................................... 146
Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes .................. 146
Activating/deactivating (on- Rear ............................................... 147
board computer) ............................ 223 Setting ........................................... 146
Display message ............................ 244 Setting the AIRSCARF vents .......... 147
Function/information .................... 204 Setting the center air vents ........... 146
Active Driving Assistance package . 204 Setting the side air vents ............... 146
Active Lane Keeping Assist Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 112
Activating/deactivating (on- Alarm system
board computer) ............................ 223 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Display message ............................ 243 Anti-lock braking system
Function/information .................... 208 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Active light function ......................... 126 Anti-theft alarm system
Active Service System see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
see ASSYST PLUS Ashtray ............................................... 275
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67 Assistance menu (on-board
Adaptive Highbeam Assist computer) .......................................... 221
Display message ............................ 239 ASSYST PLUS
Function/notes ............................. 126 Displaying a service message ........ 298
Switching on/off (on-board Hiding a service message .............. 298
computer) ...................................... 224 Notes ............................................. 298
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 365 Resetting the service interval
Air bags display ........................................... 298
Display message ............................ 235 Service message ............................ 298
Front air bag (driver, front Special service requirements ......... 298
passenger) ....................................... 42 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Head bag ......................................... 45 Activating/deactivating ................... 70
Important safety notes .................... 41 Function ........................................... 70
Knee bag .......................................... 43 Switching off the alarm .................... 70
Index 5
ATTENTION ASSIST BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

Activating/deactivating ................. 222 PLUS) .................................................... 65
Display message ............................ 242 Battery (SmartKey)
Function/notes ............................. 199 Checking .......................................... 75
Audio system Important safety notes .................... 75
see separate operating instructions Replacing ......................................... 75
Authorized Centers Battery (vehicle)
see Qualified specialist workshop Charging ........................................ 312
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Display message ............................ 241
see Qualified specialist workshop Important safety notes .................. 310
Authorized workshops Jump starting ................................. 313
see Qualified specialist workshop Blind Spot Assist
AUTO lights Activating/deactivating ................. 223
Display message ............................ 239 Display message ............................ 244
see Lights Notes/function .............................. 200
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ see Active Blind Spot Assist
stop function) .................................... 155 Brake Assist
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO see BAS (Brake Assist System)
start/stop function) .......................... 154 Brake fluid
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 121 Display message ............................ 231
Automatic transmission Notes ............................................. 366
Automatic drive program ............... 161 Brake lamps
Changing gear ............................... 159 Display message ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 251 Brakes
Driving tips .................................... 160 ABS .................................................. 64
Emergency running mode .............. 164 BAS .................................................. 64
Kickdown ....................................... 160 BAS PLUS ........................................ 65
Manual drive program .................... 162 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 366
Overview ........................................ 158 Display message ............................ 229
Problem (malfunction) ................... 164 Driving tips .................................... 171
Program selector button ................ 160 Important safety notes .................. 171
Pulling away ................................... 153 Maintenance .................................. 172
Releasing the parking lock Parking brake ................................ 168
manually ........................................ 164 Warning lamp ................................. 258
Selector lever ................................ 158 Breakdown
Shift ranges ................................... 161 see Flat tire
Starting the engine ........................ 152 Bulbs
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 160 see Changing bulbs
Transmission position display ........ 158
Transmission positions .................. 159 C
Automatic transmission
California
emergency mode ............................... 164
Important notice for retail
customers and lessees .................... 22
B
Calling up a malfunction
Bag hook ............................................ 271 see Display messages
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64 Car
see Vehicle
6 Index
Care Children
AIRCAP .......................................... 302 In the vehicle ................................... 58
Carpets .......................................... 306 Restraint systems ............................ 58
Car wash ........................................ 299 Special seat belt retractor ............... 61
Display ........................................... 305 Child seat
Exterior lights ................................ 304 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Gear or selector lever .................... 305 anchors ............................................ 61
Interior ........................................... 305 Top Tether ....................................... 62
Matte finish ................................... 301 Cigarette lighter ................................ 276
Notes ............................................. 299 Cleaning
Paint .............................................. 301 Mirror turn signal ........................... 304
Plastic trim .................................... 305 Climate control
Power washer ................................ 300 Automatic climate control (3-
Rear view camera .......................... 304 zone) .............................................. 139
Roof lining ...................................... 306 Controlling automatically ............... 141
Seat belt ........................................ 306 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 140
Seat cover ..................................... 306 Defrosting the windows ................. 144
Sensors ......................................... 304 Defrosting the windshield .............. 143
Soft top .......................................... 302 Dual-zone automatic climate
Steering wheel ............................... 305 control ........................................... 137
Tail pipes ....................................... 305 Important safety notes .................. 136
Trim pieces .................................... 306 Indicator lamp ................................ 141
Washing by hand ........................... 300 Information on using 3-zone
Wheels ........................................... 303 automatic climate control .............. 140
Wind deflector ............................... 302 Maximum cooling .......................... 144
Windows ........................................ 303 Notes on using automatic climate
Wind screen ................................... 303 control ........................................... 138
Wiper blades .................................. 304 Overview of systems ...................... 136
Wooden trim .................................. 306 Problems with cooling with air
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 271 dehumidification ............................ 141
Car wash (care) ................................. 299 Problem with the rear window
CD player/CD changer (on-board defroster ........................................ 144
computer) .......................................... 219 Rear control panel ......................... 139
Center console ..................................... 32 Setting the air distribution ............. 142
Central locking Setting the airflow ......................... 143
Automatic locking (on-board Setting the air vents ...................... 146
computer) ...................................... 225 Setting the climate mode ............... 141
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 73 Setting the temperature ................ 142
Changing bulbs Switching air-recirculation mode
High-beam headlamps ................... 131 on/off ............................................ 144
Important safety notes .................. 129 Switching on/off ........................... 140
Low-beam headlamps .................... 131 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 145
Overview of bulb types .................. 130 Switching the rear window
Parking lamps ................................ 131 defroster on/off ............................ 144
Standing lamps (front) ................... 131 Switching the ZONE function on/
Turn signals (front) ......................... 132 off .................................................. 143
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 63
Index 7
Cockpit D
Overview .......................................... 28
see Instrument cluster Dashboard
COMAND see Instrument cluster
see separate operating instructions Dashboard lighting
COMAND display see Instrument cluster lighting
Cleaning ......................................... 305 Data
Combination switch .......................... 124 see Technical data
Compass Daytime running lamps
Calibrating ..................................... 290 Display message ............................ 238
Calling up ....................................... 289 Function/notes ............................. 121
Setting ........................................... 290 Switching on/off (on-board
Consumption statistics (on-board computer) ...................................... 224
computer) .......................................... 216 Dealerships
Convenience closing feature .............. 87 see Qualified specialist workshop
Convenience opening feature ............ 86 Delayed switch-off
Coolant (engine) Exterior lighting (on-board
Checking the level ......................... 296 computer) ...................................... 225
Display message ............................ 240 Interior lighting .............................. 225
Filling capacity ............................... 367 Diagnostics connection ...................... 24
Important safety notes .................. 366 Digital speedometer ......................... 217
Temperature gauge ........................ 213 Display messages
Warning lamp ................................. 262 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 298
Cooling Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 228
see Climate control Driving systems ............................. 242
Cornering light function Engine ............................................ 240
Display message ............................ 236 General notes ................................ 228
Function/notes ............................. 126 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 228
Crash-responsive emergency KEYLESS-GO .................................. 254
lighting ............................................... 129 Lights ............................................. 236
Cruise control Safety systems .............................. 229
Activation conditions ..................... 175 SmartKey ....................................... 254
Cruise control lever ....................... 175 Tires ............................................... 248
Deactivating ................................... 176 Vehicle ........................................... 251
Display message ............................ 247 Distance display (on-board
Driving system ............................... 174 computer) .......................................... 221
Function/notes ............................. 174 Distance recorder
Important safety notes .................. 174 see Trip odometer
Setting a speed .............................. 176 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 264
Storing and maintaining current DISTRONIC PLUS
speed ............................................. 175 Deactivating ................................... 186
Cup holder Display message ............................ 245
Center console .............................. 273 Displays in the multifunction
Important safety notes .................. 273 display ........................................... 185
Rear compartment ......................... 274 Function/notes ............................. 177
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24 Important safety notes .................. 177
Customer Relations Department ....... 24
8 Index
Setting the specified minimum Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 207
distance ......................................... 184 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 199
Warning lamp ................................. 264 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 200
Doors Cruise control ................................ 174
Automatic locking (on-board Display message ............................ 242
computer) ...................................... 225 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 80 Dynamic handling package with
Central locking/unlocking sports mode .................................. 190
(SmartKey) ....................................... 73 HOLD function ............................... 189
Control panel ................................... 35 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 202
Display message ............................ 252 Lane Tracking package .................. 200
Emergency locking ........................... 81 Parking Guidance ........................... 194
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 PARKTRONIC ................................. 191
Important safety notes .................... 79 Rear view camera .......................... 197
Opening (from inside) ...................... 79 Driving tips
Draft stop ............................................. 96 Automatic transmission ................. 160
Drinking and driving ......................... 169 Brakes ........................................... 171
Drinks holder Break-in period .............................. 150
see Cup holder Downhill gradient ........................... 171
Drive program Drinking and driving ....................... 169
Automatic ...................................... 161 Driving abroad ............................... 120
Display ........................................... 158 Driving in winter ............................. 173
Manual ........................................... 162 Driving on flooded roads ................ 173
Driver's door Driving on wet roads ...................... 173
see Doors Exhaust check ............................... 170
Driving abroad Fuel ................................................ 169
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 299 General .......................................... 169
Symmetrical low beam .................. 120 Hydroplaning ................................. 173
Driving on flooded roads .................. 173 Icy road surfaces ........................... 174
Driving safety systems Limited braking efficiency on
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64 salted roads ................................... 172
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67 Pedals ............................................ 169
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64 Snow chains .................................. 325
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Symmetrical low beam .................. 120
PLUS) ............................................... 65 Wet road surface ........................... 172
Electronic brake force distribution ... 67 Drowsiness detection assistance
ESP® (Electronic Stability system
Program) .......................................... 66 see ATTENTION ASSIST
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction DVD audio
System) ........................................... 66 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 219
Important safety information ........... 64 DVD video
Overview .......................................... 63 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 220
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 67 Dynamic handling package with
Driving systems sports mode ....................................... 190
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 204
Active Driving Assistance
package ......................................... 204
Index 9
E Switching off .................................. 168

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 317
EASY-ENTRY feature Engine electronics
Activating/deactivating ................. 226 Problem (malfunction) ................... 157
Function/notes ............................. 114 Engine jump starting
EASY-EXIT feature see Jump starting (engine)
Crash-responsive ........................... 114 Engine oil
Function/notes ............................. 114 Adding ........................................... 296
Switching on/off ........................... 226 Additives ........................................ 365
EBD (electronic brake force Checking the oil level ..................... 295
distribution) Checking the oil level using the
Display message ............................ 230 dipstick .......................................... 295
Function/notes ................................ 67 Display message ............................ 241
ECO display Filling capacity ............................... 365
Function/notes ............................. 170 Notes about oil grades ................... 365
On-board computer ....................... 217 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 295
ECO start/stop function Viscosity ........................................ 365
Deactivating/activating ................. 155 ESP® (Electronic Stability
General information ....................... 154 Program)
Electronic Stability Program Deactivating/activating ................. 222
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 67
Emergency closing Display message ............................ 229
Soft top ............................................ 91 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 66
Emergency release Function/notes ................................ 66
Driver's door .................................... 80 Important safety information ........... 66
Trunk ............................................... 84 Warning lamp ................................. 259
Vehicle ............................................. 80 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Emergency spare wheel System) ................................................ 66
Important safety notes .................. 355 Exhaust check ................................... 170
Points to remember ....................... 355 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning
Storage location ............................ 356 instructions) ...................................... 305
Technical data ............................... 357 Exterior lighting
Emergency Tensioning Devices Setting options .............................. 120
Function ........................................... 57 see Lights
Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Exterior mirrors
Emissions control Adjusting ....................................... 115
Service and warranty information .... 21 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 116
Engine Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 116
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 262 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 115
Display message ............................ 240 Folding in when locking (on-board
ECO start/stop function ................ 154 computer) ...................................... 227
Engine number ............................... 362 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 116
Irregular running ............................ 157 Setting ........................................... 116
Jump-starting ................................. 313 Storing settings (memory
Starting problems .......................... 157 function) ........................................ 117
Starting the engine with the Storing the parking position .......... 116
SmartKey ....................................... 153
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 153
10 Index
F G
Filler cap Garage door opener
see Fuel filler flap Clearing the memory ..................... 289
First-aid kit ......................................... 308 Important safety notes .................. 286
Flat tire Opening/closing the garage door .. 289
MOExtended tires .......................... 309 Programming (button in the rear-
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 308 view mirror) ................................... 287
Floormat ............................................. 290 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 360
Fog lamps Glove box ........................................... 269
Switching on/off ........................... 122
Front fog lamps H
Display message ............................ 237
Handbrake
Switching on/off ........................... 122
see Parking brake
Fuel
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 125
Additives ........................................ 364
Head bags
Consumption statistics .................. 216
Display message ............................ 233
Displaying the current
Operation ......................................... 45
consumption .................................. 217
Headlamps
Displaying the range ...................... 217
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 297
Driving tips .................................... 169
Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 367
Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 364
Cleaning system (function) ............ 125
Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 213
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 367
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 363
Fogging up ..................................... 128
Important safety notes .................. 362
see Automatic headlamp mode
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 363
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 112
Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Head restraint
Refueling ........................................ 165
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 363 Lowering manually (rear) ............... 109
Fuel filler flap Head restraints
Opening/closing ............................ 165 Adjusting ....................................... 109
Fuel level Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 109
Calling up the range (on-board
see NECK-PRO head restraints
computer) ...................................... 217
Heating
Fuel tank
see Climate control
Capacity ........................................ 363
High-beam headlamps
Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Changing bulbs .............................. 131
kit) ...................................................... 308 Display message ............................ 237
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Fuses
Assist on/off ................................. 127
Allocation chart ............................. 318
Switching on/off ........................... 124
Before changing ............................. 318
Hill start assist .................................. 153
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 318
HOLD function
Fuse box in the engine
compartment ................................. 318 Display message ............................ 242
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 319 Function/notes ............................. 189
Index 11
Hood Kickdown
Closing ........................................... 295 Driving tips .................................... 160
Display message ............................ 252 Manual drive program .................... 162
Opening ......................................... 294 Knee bag .............................................. 43
Hydroplaning ..................................... 173
L
I
Lamps
Ignition lock see Warning and indicator lamps
see Key positions Lane Keeping Assist
Immobilizer .......................................... 70 Activating/deactivating ................. 223
Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 243
see Warning and indicator lamps Function/information .................... 202
Instrument cluster Lane Tracking package ..................... 200
Overview .................................. 29, 213 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Settings ......................................... 224 anchors ................................................ 61
Warning and indicator License plate lamp (display
lamps ....................................... 30, 256 message) ............................................ 237
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 213 Light function, active
Interior lighting ................................. 128 Display message ............................ 238
Automatic control .......................... 128 Lights
Delayed switch-off (on-board Activating/deactivating the
computer) ...................................... 225 interior lighting delayed switch-off . 225
Emergency lighting ........................ 129 Active light function ....................... 126
Manual control ............................... 129 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 121
Overview ........................................ 128 Cornering light function ................. 126
Reading lamp ................................. 128 Driving abroad ............................... 120
Fog lamps ...................................... 122
J Hazard warning lamps ................... 125
High beam flasher .......................... 125
Jack
High-beam headlamps ................... 124
Storage location ............................ 308
Light switch ................................... 120
Using ............................................. 346
Low-beam headlamps .................... 122
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 313
Parking lamps ................................ 123
Rear fog lamp ................................ 123
K Standing lamps .............................. 124
KEYLESS-GO Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Assist on/off ................................. 224
Display message ............................ 254 Switching the daytime running
Locking ............................................ 73 lamps on/off (on-board
Start/Stop button .......................... 151 computer) ...................................... 224
Starting the engine ........................ 153 Switching the exterior lighting
Unlocking ......................................... 73 delayed switch-off on/off (on-
Key positions board computer) ............................ 225
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 151
SmartKey ....................................... 151
12 Index
Switching the surround lighting Remote vehicle locking .................. 283

on/off (on-board computer) .......... 225 Roadside Assistance button .......... 280
Turn signals ................................... 124 Search & Send ............................... 282
see Changing bulbs Self-test ......................................... 278
see Interior lighting Speed alert .................................... 285
Light sensor (display message) ....... 239 System .......................................... 278
Loading guidelines ............................ 268 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 286
Locking Vehicle remote malfunction
see Central locking diagnosis ....................................... 284
Locking (doors) Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 283
Automatic ........................................ 80 Mechanical key
Emergency locking ........................... 81 Function/notes ................................ 74
From inside (central locking Locking vehicle ................................ 81
button) ............................................. 79 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 80
Locking centrally Memory card (audio) ......................... 219
see Central locking Memory function ............................... 117
Locking verification signal (on- Message memory (on-board
board computer) ............................... 226 computer) .......................................... 228
Low-beam headlamps Messages
Changing bulbs .............................. 131 see Display messages
Display message ............................ 236 Mirrors
Setting for driving abroad see Exterior mirrors
(symmetrical) ................................. 120 see Rear-view mirror
Switching on/off ........................... 122 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Luggage cover Mobile phone
see Trunk partition Menu (on-board computer) ............ 220
Lumbar support Modifying the programming
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar (SmartKey) ........................................... 74
support .......................................... 111 MOExtended tires .............................. 309
Mounting wheels
M Lowering the vehicle ...................... 348
Mounting a new wheel ................... 348
M+S tires ............................................ 324
Raising the vehicle ......................... 346
Malfunction message
Removing a wheel .......................... 347
see Display messages
Securing the vehicle against
Matte finish (cleaning
rolling away ................................... 345
instructions) ...................................... 301
MP3
mbrace
Operation ....................................... 219
Call priority .................................... 281 see separate operating instructions
Display message ............................ 231 Multifunction display
Downloading destinations
Function/notes ............................. 215
(COMAND) ..................................... 282
Permanent display ......................... 224
Downloading routes ....................... 285
Multifunction steering wheel
Emergency call .............................. 279
Operating the on-board computer . 214
Geo fencing ................................... 285
Overview .......................................... 31
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 284
MB info call button ........................ 281
Index 13
N Telephone menu ............................ 220

Trip menu ...................................... 216
Navigation Vehicle submenu ........................... 225
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218 Video DVD operation ..................... 220
Neck-level heating Operating system
see AIRSCARF see On-board computer
NECK-PRO head restraints Outside temperature display ........... 214
Operation ......................................... 51 Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Resetting after being triggered ........ 51 Override feature
Notes on breaking-in a new Rear side windows ........................... 63
vehicle ................................................ 150
P
O
Paint code number ............................ 361
Occupant Classification System Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 301
(OCS) Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Faults ............................................... 50 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Operation ......................................... 46 sliding panel
System self-test ............................... 49 Opening/closing ............................ 101
Occupant safety Opening/closing the roller
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58 sunblind ......................................... 102
Important safety notes .................... 38 Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
OCS Resetting ....................................... 102
Faults ............................................... 50 Panorama sliding sunroof
Operation ......................................... 46 Important safety notes .................. 100
System self-test ............................... 49 Parking ............................................... 167
Odometer Important safety notes .................. 167
see Trip odometer Parking brake ................................ 168
Oil Position of exterior mirror, front-
see Engine oil passenger side ............................... 116
On-board computer Rear view camera .......................... 197
Assistance menu ........................... 221 see PARKTRONIC
Audio menu ................................... 219 Parking aid
Convenience submenu .................. 226 Parking Guidance ........................... 194
Displaying a service message ........ 298 see Exterior mirrors
Display messages .......................... 228 see PARKTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185 Parking brake
Factory settings submenu ............. 227 Display message ............................ 231
Important safety notes .................. 212 Notes/function .............................. 168
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 224 Warning lamp ................................. 261
Lighting submenu .......................... 224 Parking Guidance
Menu overview .............................. 216 Display message ............................ 244
Message memory .......................... 228 Important safety notes .................. 194
Navigation menu ............................ 218 Parking lamps
Operation ....................................... 214 Switching on/off ........................... 123
Service menu ................................. 223 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131
Settings menu ............................... 223
Standard display ............................ 216
14 Index
PARKTRONIC Rear compartment

Deactivating/activating ................. 193 Setting the air vents ...................... 147
Driving system ............................... 191 Setting the temperature ................ 142
Function/notes ............................. 191 Rear fog lamp
Important safety notes .................. 191 Display message ............................ 238
Problem (malfunction) ................... 194 Switching on/off ........................... 123
Range of the sensors ..................... 192 Rear seats
Warning display ............................. 193 Display message ............................ 252
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Rear view camera
lamp ...................................................... 46 Cleaning instructions ..................... 304
Pedals ................................................. 169 Function/notes ............................. 197
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 305 Switching on/off ........................... 198
Power washers .................................. 300 Rear-view mirror
Power windows Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 115
see Side windows Dipping (automatic) ....................... 116
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Rear window blind ............................ 275
protection) Rear window defroster
Display message ............................ 232 Problem (malfunction) ................... 144
Operation ......................................... 52 Switching on/off ........................... 144
PRE-SAFE® Brake Refueling
Activating/deactivating ................. 222 Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 213
Display message ............................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 165
Function/notes ................................ 67 Refueling process .......................... 165
Warning lamp ................................. 264 see Fuel
Preventive occupant safety Releasing the parking lock
system manually (automatic
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory transmission) ..................................... 164
occupant protection) Remote control
Product information ............................ 21 Garage door opener ....................... 286
Program selector button .................. 160 Programming (garage door
Pulling away opener) .......................................... 287
Automatic transmission ................. 153 Reporting safety defects .................... 25
Reserve (fuel tank)
Q see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24 Display message ............................ 241
Warning lamp ................................. 262
R see Fuel
Radar sensor system Residual heat (climate control) ........ 145
Activating/deactivating ................. 226 Restraint system
Display message ............................ 242 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Radio System)
Selecting a station ......................... 219 Reverse gear
see separate operating instructions Engaging (automatic
Reading lamp ..................................... 128 transmission) ................................. 158
Reversing lamps (display
message) ............................................ 238
Index 15
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22 Folding the backrests forward/

Roll bar back ............................................... 110
Display message ............................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 107
Operation ......................................... 51 Overview ........................................ 107
Roller sunblind Seat backrest display message ..... 253
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Seat heating problem .................... 112
sliding panel .................................. 101 Seat ventilation problem ................ 112
Rear window .................................. 275 Storing settings (memory
Roof function) ........................................ 117
Overview .......................................... 89 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 112
see Soft top Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 112
guidelines) ......................................... 306 Selector lever
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 367 Cleaning ......................................... 305
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 304
S Service
see ASSYST PLUS
Safety Service menu (on-board computer) . 223
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58 Service products
Child restraint systems .................... 58 Brake fluid ..................................... 366
Occupant Classification System Coolant (engine) ............................ 366
(OCS) ............................................... 46 Engine oil ....................................... 365
Safety systems Fuel ................................................ 362
see Driving safety systems Important safety notes .................. 362
Seat belts Washer fluid ................................... 367
Adjusting the driver's and front- Service work
passenger seat belt ......................... 56 see ASSYST PLUS
Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 58 Settings
Belt force limiters ............................ 57 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 227
Cleaning ......................................... 306 On-board computer ....................... 223
Correct usage .................................. 54 Setting the air distribution ............... 142
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 57
Setting the airflow ............................ 143
Fastening ......................................... 55
Side impact air bag ............................. 43
Important safety guidelines ............. 53
Side marker lamp (display
Releasing ......................................... 56
message) ............................................ 238
Safety guidelines ............................. 40
Side windows
Switching belt adjustment on/off
Cleaning ......................................... 303
(on-board computer) ...................... 227
Convenience closing feature ............ 87
Warning lamp ................................. 257
Convenience opening feature .......... 86
Warning lamp (function) ................... 57
Important safety information ........... 84
Seats
Opening/closing .............................. 85
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108
Opening/closing all (Cabriolet) ........ 85
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
support .......................................... 111
Resetting ......................................... 88
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 109
Sliding sunroof
Cleaning the cover ......................... 306
see Panorama roof with power
Correct driver's seat position ........ 106
tilt/sliding panel
16 Index
SmartKey SRS (Supplemental Restraint

Changing the battery ....................... 75 System)
Changing the programming ............. 74 Display message ............................ 233
Checking the battery ....................... 75 Introduction ..................................... 39
Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Warning lamp ................................. 261
Convenience opening feature .......... 86 Warning lamp (function) ................... 39
Display message ............................ 254 Standing lamps
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 73 Changing bulbs .............................. 131
Important safety notes .................... 72 Display message ............................ 238
Loss ................................................. 77 Switching on/off ........................... 124
Mechanical key ................................ 74 Starting (engine) ................................ 152
Opening/closing soft top ................. 91 Steering (display message) .............. 253
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 151 Steering wheel
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 77 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 113
Starting the engine ........................ 153 Button overview ............................... 31
Snow chains ...................................... 325 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 214
Sockets Cleaning ......................................... 305
Center console .............................. 277 Important safety notes .................. 113
General notes ................................ 277 Paddle shifters ............................... 160
Rear compartment ......................... 277 Storing settings (memory
Soft top function) ........................................ 117
AIRCAP ............................................ 97 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 160
Cleaning ......................................... 302 Stowage areas ................................... 268
Closing manually in an emergency ... 91 Stowage compartments
Display message ............................ 253 Armrest (under) ............................. 269
Important safety notes .................... 89 Cup holders ................................... 273
Installing/removing the AIRCAP Glove box ....................................... 269
wind screen ..................................... 98 Important safety information ......... 268
Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 91 Stowage net ................................... 269
Opening/closing (with soft-top Stowage net ....................................... 269
switch) ............................................. 90 Stowage well beneath the trunk
Problem (malfunction) ................... 100 floor .................................................... 272
Relocking ......................................... 95 Summer tires ..................................... 324
wind screen ..................................... 96 Sun visor ............................................ 274
Soft-top switch .................................... 90 Supplement Restraint System
Spare wheel see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Storage location ............................ 356 System)
Specialist workshop ............................ 24 Surround lighting (on-board
Special seat belt retractor .................. 61 computer) .......................................... 225
Speed, controlling Switching air-recirculation mode
see Cruise control on/off ................................................. 144
Speedometer Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 70
Digital ............................................ 217
In the Instrument cluster ......... 29, 213 T
Segments ...................................... 214
Selecting the unit of Tachometer ........................................ 214
measurement ................................ 224 Tail lamps
see Instrument cluster Display message ............................ 237
Index 17
Tank content Display message ............................ 248

Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 213 Maximum ....................................... 328
Technical data Notes ............................................. 327
Emergency spare wheel ................. 357 Recommended ............................... 325
Information .................................... 360 Tire pressure loss warning system
Tires/wheels ................................. 349 Important safety notes .................. 329
Vehicle data ................................... 367 Restarting ...................................... 329
TELEAID Tire pressure monitoring system
Call priority .................................... 281 Checking the tire pressure
Downloading destinations electronically ................................. 332
(COMAND) ..................................... 282 Function/notes ............................. 330
Downloading routes ....................... 285 Restarting ...................................... 332
Emergency call .............................. 279 Warning lamp ................................. 265
Geo fencing ................................... 285 Warning message .......................... 332
Important safety notes .................. 277 Tires
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 284 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 343
MB info call button ........................ 281 Average weight of the vehicle
Remote vehicle locking .................. 283 occupants (definition) .................... 342
Roadside Assistance button .......... 280 Bar (definition) ............................... 341
Search & Send ............................... 282 Changing a wheel .......................... 344
Self-test ......................................... 278 Characteristics .............................. 341
Speed alert .................................... 285 Checking ........................................ 323
System .......................................... 278 Definition of terms ......................... 341
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 286 Direction of rotation ...................... 344
Vehicle remote malfunction Display message ............................ 248
diagnosis ....................................... 284 Distribution of the vehicle
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 283 occupants (definition) .................... 344
Telephone DOT, Tire Identification Number
Accepting a call ............................. 220 (TIN) ............................................... 341
Display message ............................ 253 DOT (Department of
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 220 Transportation) (definition) ............ 342
Number from the phone book ........ 221 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Redialing ........................................ 221 (definition) ..................................... 342
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 220 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Temperature (definition) ..................................... 342
Coolant .......................................... 213 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Outside temperature ...................... 214 Rating) (definition) ......................... 342
Setting (climate control) ................ 142 Important safety notes .................. 322
Theft deterrent systems Increased vehicle weight due to
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 70 optional equipment (definition) ...... 342
Immobilizer ...................................... 70 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 342
Through-loading ................................ 270 Labeling (overview) ........................ 338
Through-loading feature ................... 270 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 343
Time Load index ..................................... 340
see Separate Operator's Manual Load index (definition) ................... 342
Tire pressure Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 330 (definition) ..................................... 342
Checking manually ........................ 329
18 Index
Maximum load on a tire Towing away

(definition) ..................................... 343 With both axles on the ground ....... 316
Maximum permissible tire Tow-starting
pressure (definition) ....................... 343 Emergency engine starting ............ 317
Maximum tire load ......................... 340 Important safety notes .................. 315
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 343 Transfer case ..................................... 164
MOExtended tires .......................... 324 Transmission
Optional equipment weight see Automatic transmission
(definition) ..................................... 343 Transporting the vehicle .................. 317
PSI (pounds per square inch) Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 306
(definition) ..................................... 343 Trip computer (on-board
Replacing ....................................... 344 computer) .......................................... 216
Service life ..................................... 324 Trip odometer
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 343 Calling up ....................................... 216
Speed rating (definition) ................ 342 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 217
Storing ........................................... 344 Trunk
Structure and characteristics Emergency release .......................... 83
(definition) ..................................... 341 Important safety notes .................... 81
Temperature .................................. 337 Locking separately ........................... 83
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Opening/closing (manually from
(definition) ..................................... 343 outside) ............................................ 82
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 343 Opening (automatically from
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 343 inside) .............................................. 83
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 342 Opening (automatically from
Tire size (data) ............................... 349 outside) ............................................ 82
Tire size designation, load-bearing Trunk lid
capacity, speed rating .................... 338 Display message ............................ 252
Tire tread ....................................... 323 Opening/closing .............................. 81
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 343 Opening dimensions ...................... 367
Total load limit (definition) ............. 344 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 367
Traction ......................................... 337 Trunk partition
Traction (definition) ....................... 343 Display message ............................ 253
Tread wear ..................................... 337 General notes .................................. 96
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Opening/closing .............................. 96
Standards ...................................... 336 Turn signals
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Changing bulbs (front) ................... 132
Standards (definition) .................... 342 Display message ............................ 236
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 343 Switching on/off ........................... 124
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 343 Type identification plate
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 342 see Vehicle identification plate
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 62 U
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 315 Unlocking
Installing the towing eye ................ 315 Emergency unlocking ....................... 80
Removing the towing eye ............... 316 From inside the vehicle (central
With the rear axle raised ................ 316 unlocking button) ............................. 79
Index 19
V PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp .................................. 46
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 274 Reserve fuel ................................... 262
Vehicle Seat belt ........................................ 257
Data acquisition ............................... 25 SRS ................................................ 261
Display message ............................ 251 Tire pressure monitor .................... 265
Equipment ....................................... 21 Warranty ............................................ 360
Individual settings .......................... 223 Washer fluid
Limited Warranty ............................. 25 Display message ............................ 254
Loading .......................................... 333 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 348
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 81 Wheel chock ...................................... 345
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 73 Wheels
Lowering ........................................ 348 Changing a wheel .......................... 344
Maintenance .................................... 22 Checking ........................................ 323
Parking for a long period ................ 169 Cleaning ......................................... 303
Pulling away ................................... 153 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 344
Raising ........................................... 346 Emergency spare wheel ................. 355
Reporting problems ......................... 24 Important safety notes .................. 322
Securing from rolling away ............ 345 Interchanging/changing ................ 344
Towing away .................................. 315 Mounting a new wheel ................... 348
Transporting .................................. 317 Mounting a wheel .......................... 345
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 80 Removing a wheel .......................... 347
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 73 Storing ........................................... 344
Vehicle data ................................... 367 Tightening torque ........................... 348
Vehicle data ....................................... 367 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 349
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 367 Wind deflector
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 81 see AIRCAP
Vehicle identification number Wind deflector (cleaning
see VIN instructions) ...................................... 302
Vehicle identification plate .............. 361 Window curtain air bag
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 308 Operation ......................................... 46
Video Windows
Operating the DVD ......................... 220 see Side windows
VIN ...................................................... 361 Wind screen (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 303
W Windshield
Warning and indicator lamps Defrosting ...................................... 143
ABS ................................................ 258 Windshield washer fluid
Brakes ........................................... 258 see Windshield washer system
Check Engine ................................. 262 Windshield washer system
Coolant .......................................... 262 Adding washer fluid ....................... 297
Distance warning ........................... 264 Filling capacity ............................... 367
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 264 Notes ............................................. 367
ESP® .............................................. 259 Windshield wipers
ESP® OFF ....................................... 260 Problem (malfunction) ................... 133
Fuel tank ........................................ 262 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 133
Overview .................................. 30, 256 Switching on/off ........................... 132
20 Index
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 174
Snow chains .................................. 325
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 324
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 304
Replacing ....................................... 133
Wooden trim (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 306
Workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
Introduction 21
Product information Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard

of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
parts and accessories that have been
approved for your vehicle. Vehicle equipment
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as This Operator's Manual describes all models
conversion parts and accessories that have and all standard and optional equipment of
been specifically approved for your vehicle for your vehicle available at the time of going to
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite print. Country-specific differences are
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is possible. Please note that your vehicle may
unable to assess other parts. Therefore, not be equipped with all features described.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for This also applies to safety-related systems
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz and functions. The equipment in your vehicle
vehicles. This is also the case, even if they may therefore differ from some of the
have been independently or officially descriptions or illustrations.
approved. The use of non-approved parts The original purchase agreement lists all
could affect your vehicle's operating safety. systems installed in your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
conversion parts and accessories are if you have any questions about equipment or
available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz operation.
Center. Here, you will receive advice about
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
permissible technical modifications, and the
Booklet are important documents and should
parts will be professionally installed.
be kept in the vehicle.
Printed Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation

The printed Operator's Manual (including any Service and literature
Supplements) must be observed.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
There is no electronic update to the Digital warranties printed in the Service and
Operator's Manual. Amendments are only Warranty Information booklet. Your
made to the printed Operator's Manual. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
Operator's Manual accordance with the terms of the following
General notes warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with REmission Systems Warranty
your vehicle. REmission Performance Warranty
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
follow the instructions and warning notices in Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
this manual. Disregarding them may lead to Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Control Systems Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
22 Introduction
Information for customers in Maintenance

California
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a Always have the Service and Warranty
reasonable number of repair attempts Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service advisor will record every service for
one or more substantial defects or you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the Roadside Assistance
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a Program offers technical help in the event of
reasonable number of repair attempts is a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or Assistance Hotline are answered by our
more of the following occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or
(USA)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information, refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Assistance" section in the Service and
writing of the need for its repair, Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
(2) the same substantial defect or in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or change of
notified us in writing of the need for its ownership
repair, or In the event of a change of address, please
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of send us the "Notification of Address Change"
repair of the same or different substantial in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
total of more than 30 calendar days. Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
One Mercedes Drive contacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
Introduction 23
If you have purchased a used car, please send Operating safety

us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply Important safety notes
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
G WARNING
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Work improperly carried out on electronic
Customer Service (Canada) at components and associated software could
1-800-387-0100. cause them to cease functioning. Because the
vehicle's electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may
Vehicle operation outside the USA produce an undesired effect on other
and Canada systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign vehicle.
countries, please be aware that: Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may for repairs or modifications to electronic
not be readily available. components.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Other improper work or modifications on the
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel vehicle could also have a negative impact on
may cause damage to the catalytic the operating safety of the vehicle.
converter. Some safety systems only function when the
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower engine is running. You should therefore never
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause turn off the engine while driving.
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available G WARNING
for delivery in Europe through our European Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
Delivery Program. For details, consult an tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
one of the following addresses. Such blows can be caused, for example, by
In the USA running over an obstacle, road debris or a
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC pothole.
European Delivery Department If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage
One Mercedes Drive
to your vehicle has occurred:
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.
In Canada
Rslow down carefully.
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
European Delivery Department
distance from the road.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Z
24 Introduction
Declarations of conformity Do not attach any equipment or cables in the

driver's footwell.
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves ! If the engine is switched off and
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle equipment on the diagnostics connection
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Operation is subject to the following two The diagnostics connection is only intended
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
harmful interference, and 2) These devices a qualified specialist workshop.
must accept any interference received, Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
including interference that may cause connection can, for example, lead to
undesired operation. Changes or emissions monitoring information being
modifications not expressly approved by the reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to
party responsible for compliance could void meet the requirements of the next emissions
the user’s authority to operate the test during the main inspection.
equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt Qualified specialist workshop
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
following two conditions: (1) These devices
qualified specialist workshop. It has the
may not cause interference, and (2) These
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
devices must accept any interference,
qualifications to correctly carry out the work
including interference that may cause
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
undesired operation of the device."
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Diagnostics connection Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at
G WARNING an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
If you connect equipment to the on-board Rwork relevant to safety
diagnostics connection, it can affect the
Rservice and maintenance work
operation of the vehicle systems. This can
Rrepair work
impair the operating safety of your vehicle
while driving. There is a risk of an accident. Ralterations, installation work and
Do not connect any equipment to the on- modifications

board diagnostics connection. Rwork on electronic components
G WARNING
Loose equipment or equipment cables which Problems with your vehicle
are connected to the on-board diagnostics If you should experience a problem with your
connection can obstruct the area around the vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
pedals. The equipment or the cables could affect its safe operation, we urge you to
come between the pedals in the event of contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
sudden braking or acceleration. This may immediately to have the problem diagnosed
affect the function of the pedals. There is a and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
risk of an accident. your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
Introduction 25
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or Limited Warranty

contact us at one of the following addresses.
! Follow the instructions in this manual
In the USA
about the proper operation of your vehicle
Customer Assistance Center as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Damage to your vehicle that arises from
One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
In Canada Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Data stored in the vehicle
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Information about electronic data
acquisition in the vehicle
Reporting safety defects (Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
USA only:
Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
The following text is reproduced as required
vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:
of all manufacturers according to Title 49,
TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
an accident.
pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. This information helps, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
continually improve vehicle safety.
which could cause a crash or could cause
Daimler AG can access this data and submit
injury or death, you should immediately
it:
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. purposes
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
open an investigation, and if it finds that a Ron the instruction of prosecuting
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it authorities
may order a recall and remedy campaign. Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
individual problems between you, your and service organizations
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE
Safety Hotline toll-free at AID) purchase agreement to find out more
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go about data that can be recorded and
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: transmitted by this system.
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can obtain additional information about
vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Z
26 Introduction
Information on copyright redistribution. Redistributions and use in

source and binary forms, with or without
Registered trademarks modification, are permitted provided that the
Registered trademarks: following conditions are met:
RBluetooth®
1. Redistribution of source code must retain
is a registered trademark of
the above copyright notice, this list of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
conditions and the following disclaimer.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
2. Redistribution in binary form must
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
reproduce the above copyright notice,
of DOLBY Laboratories. this list of conditions and the following
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are disclaimer in the documentation and/or
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. other materials provided with the
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of distribution.
Prince. 3. All advertising materials mentioning
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered features or use of this software must
trademarks of Apple Inc. display the following acknowledgment:
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
This product includes software developed
by the University of California, Berkeley
Harman International Industries.
and its contributors.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
registered trademarks of Microsoft names of its contributors may be used to
Corporation. endorse or promote products derived
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
from this software without specific prior
XM radio Inc. written permission.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
iBiquity Digital Corporation. REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
Gracenote, Inc. INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
LLC. PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
FreeType INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
Portions of this software are copyright © 2005 DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
rights reserved. © 1996-2000 by David OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
Gnu compiler LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
University of California. All rights reserved. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
The Berkeley software License Agreement
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
specifies the terms and conditions for
27
Cockpit ................................................. 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 29
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31
At a glance
Center console .................................... 32
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel .............................. 35
28 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle E Adjusting the steering
shifters 160 wheel electrically 113
; Cruise control lever 175 F Combination switch 124
= Instrument cluster 29 G Parking brake 168
? Horn H Diagnostics connection 24
A PARKTRONIC warning I Opening the hood 294
display 191
J Releasing the parking brake 168
B Overhead control panel 34
K Light switch 120
C Climate control systems 136
D Ignition lock 151
Start/Stop button 151
Instrument cluster 29
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Fuel gauge ? Multifunction display 215
; Time, see the separate A Tachometer 214
operating instructions
B Coolant temperature 213
= Speedometer with
segments
C Instrument lighting 213
214
30 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: å ESP® OFF 259 F 6 SRS 261
; N Front fog lamps 122 G ; Check Engine 262
= R Rear fog lamp 123 H J Brakes (Canada only) 258
? #! Turn signals 124 I h Tire pressure monitor
(USA only) 265
A ä ESP® 259
J ? Coolant 262
B · Distance warning 264
K $ Brakes (USA only) 258
C K High-beam headlamp 124
L ! ABS 258
D L Low-beam
headlamps 122 M 8 Reserve fuel 262
E ü Seat belt 257
Multifunction steering wheel 31
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 215 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 214
separate Operating 9:
Instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 214
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms your selection 214
Control System; see the
separate operating Hides display messages 228
instructions B %
? ~ Back 214
Rejects or ends a call 220 Switches off the Voice
Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the
memory separate operating
6 instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
32 Center console
Center console
Coupe
At a glance

: Hazard warning lamps 125 F Dynamic handling package
with sports mode 190
; ATA indicator lamp 70
G Ashtray 275
= 45 indicator lamp 46
Cigarette lighter 276
? Moves the seat-belt
H Selector lever 158
extender forwards 55
I Cup holders 273
A COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions J Stowage compartment 268
B Seat heating 111 K COMAND controller; see
the separate operating
C Seat ventilation 112
instructions
D Rear window roller sunblind 275
L Selects the drive program 160
E PARKTRONIC 191
Center console 33
Cabriolet
At a glance
: Hazard warning lamps 125 H Ashtray 275
; ATA indicator lamp 70 Cigarette lighter 276
= 45 indicator lamp
I Selector lever 158
46
J Cup holders 273
? Moves the seat-belt
extender forwards 55 K Stowage compartment 268
A COMAND; see the separate L AIRCAP 97
operating instructions
M Opens and closes the side
B Seat heating 111 windows 84
C Seat ventilation 112 N Opens and closes the soft
top 89
D AIRSCARF 112
O COMAND controller; see
E Retracts the rear seat head
the separate operating
restraints 109
instructions
F PARKTRONIC 191
P Selects the drive program 160
G Dynamic handling package
with sports mode 190
34 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear E Integrated electronic
interior lighting on/off 129 compass 289
; | Switches the F Microphone for mbrace
automatic interior lighting (emergency call system),
control on/off 129 telephone and Voice
Control System; see the
= p Switches the right- separate operating
hand reading lamp on/off 128 instructions
? 3 Opens/closes the G F Roadside Assistance
panorama roof with power call button (mbrace
tilt/sliding panel with roller system) 280
sunblind 101
H p Switches the left-
A ï MB Info call button hand reading lamp on/off 128
(mbrace system) 281
I c Switches the front
B G SOS button (mbrace interior lighting on/off 129
system) 279
C Rear-view mirror 116
D Buttons for the garage door
opener 287
Door control panel 35
Door control panel
At a glance
: r45= B W Opens/closes the
Stores settings for the seat, side windows 85
exterior mirrors and
steering wheel 117
C n Activates/
deactivates the override
; Adjusts the seats feature for the side
electrically 108 windows in the rear
compartment 63
= %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 79 D o Opens the trunk lid 83
? Opens the door 79
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 115
36
37
Useful information .............................. 38

Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Occupant safety .................................. 38
Children in the vehicle ........................ 58
Driving safety systems ....................... 63
Safety
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 70
38 Occupant safety
Useful information 1. This device may not cause interference,

and
i This Operator's Manual describes all 2. this device must accept any interference
models and all standard and optional received, including interference that may
equipment of your vehicle available at the cause undesired operation.
Safety
time of publication of the Operator's Any unauthorized modification to this

Manual. Country-specific differences are device could void the user's authority to
possible. Please note that your vehicle may operate the equipment.
not be equipped with all features The Product label with FCC ID and IC
described. This also applies to safety- certification number can be found in the
related systems and functions. battery case of the SmartKey.
i Read the information on qualified i Canada only:
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
This device complies with RSS-Gen of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Panic alarm
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
The Product label with FCC ID and IC
certification number can be found in the
battery case of the SmartKey.
X To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second. Occupant safety
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes. Important safety notes
X To deactivate: press ! button :
G WARNING
again. Modifications to or work improperly
or conducted on restraint system components
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or their wiring, as well as tampering with
or interconnected electronic systems, can lead
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. to the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
vehicle. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
i USA only: inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
This device complies with Part 15 of the although the deceleration threshold for air
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
following two conditions: never modify the restraint systems. Do not
Occupant safety 39
tamper with electronic components or their effect of the forces to which occupants are
software. subjected during an accident.
In this section, you will learn the most SRS warning lamp
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle. G WARNING
Safety
The restraint system consists of: The SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:
Rseat belts
Rdoes not light up at all
Rchild restraint systems
Rdoes not go out after approximately four
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
seconds after the engine is started
Additional protection is provided by:
Rlights up after the engine is started or while
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) the vehicle is in motion
RNECK-PRO head restraints For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly
RPRE-SAFE® recommends that you have the system
RCabriolet: roll bar checked as soon as possible at a qualified
Rair bag system components with: specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail
to activate when it is needed in the event of
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
an accident, which could lead to serious or
- front-passenger seat with Occupant
fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated
Classification System (OCS) unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could
The different air bag systems work also result in injury.
independently of each other. The protective In addition, work carried out improperly on
functions of the system work in conjunction SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause
with each other. Not all air bags are deployed unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
in an accident. SRS system should only be carried out by
i See "Children in the vehicle" for qualified specialist personnel. Consult a
information on infants and children qualified specialist workshop.
traveling with you in the vehicle restraint If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
systems for infants and children to accommodate a person with disabilities,
(Y page 58). contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for details. USA only: for further information,
contact our Customer Assistance Center at
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
Introduction SRS functions are checked regularly when

SRS consists of: you switch on the ignition and when the
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
R6 SRS warning lamp can be detected in good time.
RAir bags The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
RAir bag control unit with crash sensors cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
REmergency Tensioning Devices on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
RBelt force limiters after the engine is started.
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming The SRS components are in operational
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the readiness when the SRS 6 indicator lamp
event of an accident. It can also reduce the goes out while the engine is running.
Z
40 Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for seat belts, RKeep area between air bags and occupants
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
and air bags umbrellas, etc.).
RCoupe: Do not hang items such as coat
G WARNING
hangers on the coat hooks or handles over
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
Safety
the door. These items may be thrown

been subjected to stress in an accident
around in the vehicle and cause head and
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
other injuries when the window curtain air
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
bag is deployed.
installed or supplied by an authorized
RAir bag system components will be hot after
Mercedes-Benz Center.
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
RNever place your feet on the instrument
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
special handling and regard for the keep both feet on the floor in front of the
environment. Check your national disposal seat.
guidelines. California residents, see RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
Perchlorate/index.cfm. causing unintended air bag deployment.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function Work on the SRS must therefore only be
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD performed by qualified technicians.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
RFor your protection and the protection of
belt tensioners in addition to the
pyrotechnic ETDs. others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
They could tear.
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not make any modification that could
Center.
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
required inflation volume, and the material
severely weaken them. In a crash they may of the air bags, there is the possibility of
not be able to provide adequate protection. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo not change or remove any component If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
or part of the SRS. strongly recommends that you inform the
RDo not install additional trim material, seat subsequent owner that the vehicle is
covers, badges, etc. over the steering equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,
door trim panels, or door frame trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
Occupant safety 41
Air bags As the air bag inflates with considerable

speed and force, a proper seating position
Important safety notes and correct positioning of the hands on the
G WARNING steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
Safety
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front- seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
passenger front air bags and knee bag on inflates with great force instantaneously:
the driver's side) Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, pelvis
in a position that is as upright as possible
air bags, window curtain air bags on the with your back against the backrest.
Coupe and head bags on the Cabriolet) Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
Rrollover in a Cabriolet (head bags)
possible, still permitting proper operation
However, no system available today can of vehicle controls. The distance from the
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. center of the driver's chest to the center of
When the air bags are deployed, a small the air bag cover on the steering wheel
amount of powder is released. The powder must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
generally does not constitute a health hazard should be able to accomplish this by
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
vehicle. In order to prevent potential you have any difficulties, please contact an
breathing difficulties, you should leave the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get steering wheel or dashboard.
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
then get fresh air by opening a window or Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
door. increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
G WARNING inflates.
In order to reduce the potential danger of Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
injuries caused during the deployment of the as possible from the dashboard when the
front air bags, the driver and front passenger seat is occupied.
must always be correctly seated and wear Roccupants, especially children, should
their seat belts.
never place their bodies or lean their heads
For maximum protection in the event of a in the area of the door where the side
collision, you must always be in the normal impact air bag (Coupe) or the side impact
seat position with your back against the air bag and the head bag (Cabriolet) inflate.
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure This could result in serious injuries or death
that it is correctly positioned on your body. should the side impact air bags (Coupe) or
side impact air bags and head bag
(Cabriolet) inflate. Always sit as upright as
possible, wear the seat belt properly and
use an appropriately sized child restraint
system, infant restraint system or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Z
42 Occupant safety
Failure to follow these instructions can result to the extent possible by a properly fastened
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you needed to provide the best possible
make the buyer aware of this safety protection in a rollover.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Air bags provide additional protection; they
Safety
Operator's Manual. are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.

All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
G WARNING belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
Accident research shows that the safest place equipped with air bags or not.
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. It is important for your safety and that of your
A side impact air bag related injury may occur passengers to have deployed air bags
if occupants, especially children, are not replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
properly seated or restrained when next to a bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
side impact air bag which needs to deploy air bags continue to perform their protective
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
Front air bags
(1) Always sit as upright as possible
and use the seat belts properly.
Make sure that children 12 years
old and under use an appropriately
sized child restraint, infant
restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a

bang, and a small amount of powder may also
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
affect your hearing. The powder that is
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp box.
lights up. The front air bags increase protection for the
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control driver's and front-passenger's head and
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in chest.
the event of such a situation will the air bags They are deployed:
provide their supplemental protection. Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
If the driver and front passenger do not wear Rifthe system determines that air bag
their seat belts, it is not possible for the air deployment can offer additional protection
bags to provide their supplemental to that provided by the seat belt
protection. Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
In the event of other types of impacts and used
impacts below air bag deployment Rindependently of other air bags in the
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The vehicle
driver and passengers will then be protected
Occupant safety 43
If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are Front-passenger front air bag will only deploy
generally not deployed. If the system detects if:
high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal Rthe system, based on the OCS weight
direction, the front air bags are deployed. sensor readings, has detected that the
If a child restraint system is installed to the front-passenger seat is occupied.
Safety
front-passenger seat and the 4 Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp console is not lit (Y page 46).
does not light up on the center console: Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high
Ra child restraint system without impact severity.
transponders for air bag deactivation
system is installed or Driver's knee bag
Ra child restraint system with transponders
is not properly installed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. In the first deployment stage,
the front air bag is filled with enough
propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
The deployment of the front-passenger front Driver's knee bag : deploys under the
air bag is also influenced by the weight steering column. It is deployed together with
category of the front passenger, which is the front air bags. The driver's knee bag is
determined by the Occupant Classification designed to operate together with the front
System (OCS) (Y page 46). air bags in frontal impacts if certain
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required bag operates best in conjunction with
(predicted at the start of the impact) for correctly positioned and fastened seat belts.
second-stage inflation of the front-passenger The driver's knee bag increases protection of
front air bag. In the second stage, the front the driver against:
air bags are inflated with the maximum
Rknee injuries
amount of propellant gas available.
Rthighinjuries
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is Rlower leg injuries
predicted. You will then be protected by the
fastened seat belt. Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Z
44 Occupant safety
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center The side impact air bags are deployed:
for availability. Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
G WARNING of lateral vehicle deceleration or
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Safety
control are located in the doors. Do not Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
modify any components of the doors or door
Rindependently of the front air bags
trim panels including, for example, the
Rindependently of the ETDs
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the Cabriolet: if the vehicle overturns, the side
modification or addition of components to the impact air bags are generally not deployed.
doors create a risk of rendering the side side impact air bags are deployed if the
impact air bags inoperative or causing system detects high vehicle deceleration or
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the acceleration in a lateral direction and
doors must therefore only be performed by determines that side impact air bag
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized deployment can offer additional protection to
Mercedes-Benz Center. that provided by the seat belt.
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side is not deployed in the
following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
Side impact air bags (example: Coupe) fastened.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side The side impact air bag on the front-
impact air bags; deploy next to the outer passenger side will deploy if the front-
seat cushions. passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
additional protection for the thorax of the or not.
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs. However, they
do not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
Occupant safety 45
Head bags fastened, regardless of whether the front-

passenger seat is occupied or not.
Pelvis air bags

G WARNING
Safety
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Example: headbag on the front-passenger side for availability.
The Cabriolet is equipped with head bags.
Headbags enhance the level of protection for
the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
the impact occurs.
Head bags : deploy in the area of the side
windows at the front. They are deployed:
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Ron the side on which an impact occurs Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level
Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in of protection of the vehicle occupants on the
the event of a vehicle rollover and if the side of the vehicle on which the impact
system determines that air bag deployment occurs.
can offer the vehicle occupants additional Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below
protection to that provided by the seat belt the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Headbags will not deploy in side impacts of lateral vehicle deceleration or
which do not exceed the system's preset acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
deployment thresholds for lateral Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
Rindependently of the ETDs
The head bag on the front-passenger side is
not deployed in the following situations: Cabriolet: if the vehicle overturns, the pelvis
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
air bags are generally not deployed.
Exception: if the system detects high vehicle
seat is unoccupied.
deceleration or acceleration in a lateral
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not direction and determines that deployment
fastened. can offer additional protection to that
The headbag on the front-passenger side will provided by the seat belt.
deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is
Z
46 Occupant safety
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
impacts which do not exceed the system's seat is occupied
preset deployment thresholds for lateral Rindependently of the front air bags
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be Window curtain air bags will not deploy in
protected by the fastened seat belt. impacts which do not exceed the system's
Safety
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side preset deployment thresholds for lateral
is not deployed in the following situations: acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger protected by the fastened seat belt.
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
Occupant Classification System
fastened.
(OCS)
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is Method of operation
fastened, regardless of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied or not. G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
Window curtain air bags when an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the passenger seat, have the
passenger position him/herself in the seat
until the 45 indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS has classified the
front passenger seat occupant as weighing as
much as or less than a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint or if the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front
Window curtain air bags are available in the passenger seat occupant is classified as
Coupe being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
window curtain air bags : enhance the level
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
of protection for the head, but not chest or
illuminate when the engine is started and
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
remain illuminated. This indicates that the
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The window curtain air bags are integrated
When the OCS senses that the front
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the area extending from the front door (A-
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
pillar) to the rear sidewall (C-pillar).
when the engine is started and remain
Window curtain air bags are deployed: illuminated. This indicates that the front
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate passenger front air bag is deactivated.
of lateral vehicle deceleration or When the OCS senses that the front
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact passenger seat occupant is classified as
Ron the side on which an impact occurs being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
Occupant safety 47
as a young teenager or a small adult), the Regardless of seating position, children 12

45 indicator lamp will illuminate for years old and under must be seated and
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is properly secured in an appropriate infant
started. Depending on occupant weight restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
sensor readings from the seat, it will then recommended for the size and weight of the
Safety
remain illuminated or go out. With the child.
45 indicator lamp illuminated, the The infant or child restraint must be properly
front passenger front air bag is deactivated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
With the 45 indicator lamp out, the belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors
front passenger front air bag is activated. and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with
When the OCS senses that the front the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
passenger seat occupant is classified as an Occupants, especially children, should always
adult or someone larger than a small sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
individual, the 45 indicator lamp will properly and use an appropriately sized infant
illuminate for approximately six seconds restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
when the engine is started and then go out. recommended for the size and weight of the
This indicates that the front passenger front child.
air bag is activated. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, an inflating air bag. Note the following
the front passenger front air bag is important information when circumstances
deactivated and will not be deployed. require you to place a child in the front-
If the 45 indicator lamp is not passenger seat:
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
is activated and will be deployed technology designed to deactivate the
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Rif
when the system senses the weight of a
the impact exceeds a predetermined
typical 12-month-old child or less along
triggering threshold
with the weight of a standard appropriate
RCoupe: independent of the side impact air
child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
bag or pelvis air bag
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
RCabriolet: independent of the side impact
front-passenger seat will be seriously
air bag, pelvis air bag or head bag injured or even killed if the front-passenger
If the front passenger front air bag is front air bag inflates in a collision which
deployed, the rate of inflation will be could occur under some circumstances,
influenced by even with the air bag technology installed
Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
by the air bag control unit this risk completely is never to place a child
Rthe front passenger's weight category as in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
identified by the OCS passenger seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
G WARNING in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear
seat.
According to accident statistics, children are
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, the front-passenger seat, make sure the
we strongly recommend that children be 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
placed in the rear seats whenever possible. indicating that the front-passenger front air
Z
48 Occupant safety
bag is deactivated. Should the 45 cause the passenger's weight to be lifted

indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while from the seat cushion as this may result in
the restraint is installed, please check the OCS being unable to correctly
installation. Periodically check the approximate the passenger's weight
45 indicator lamp while driving to category.
Safety
make sure that the 45 indicator RRead and observe all warnings in this
lamp is illuminated. If the 45 chapter.
indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do
not transport a child on the front-passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and If the SmartKey has been removed from the
weight of the child ignition lock or is in position 0, the
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's 45 indicator lamp : does not light
seat belt according to the child seat up.
manufacturer's instructions The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
RFor children larger than the typical 12- categorizes the occupant on the front-
month-old child, the front-passenger front passenger seat using a weight sensor. The
air bag may or may not be activated. front-passenger front air bag is deactivated
automatically for certain weight categories.
G WARNING 45 indicator lamp : shows you the
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the current status. If
instrument cluster and the 45 45 indicator lamp : lights up, the
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the front-passenger air bag is disabled.
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger The system does not deactivate:
front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Rthe side impact air bag
Have the system checked by qualified
Rthe pelvis air bag
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
Rthe window curtain air bag (Coupe)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthe front-passenger head bag (Cabriolet)
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
In order to ensure proper operation of the air To be classified correctly, the front passenger
bag system and OCS: must sit:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
position that is as upright as possible with Rina position that is as upright as possible
your back against the seat backrest. with their back against the seat backrest
RWhen seated, a passenger should not Rwith their feet on the floor
position him/herself in such a way as to
Occupant safety 49
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if Center before seating any child on the front
the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by passenger seat.
leaning on the armrest.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or G WARNING
the seat cushion are damaged, have the Never place anything between seat cushion
Safety
necessary repair work carried out at a and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces
qualified specialist workshop. the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz and rear side child restraint system must be
recommends that you only use seat placed entirely on the seat cushion and the
accessories that have been approved by backrest of the front-passenger seat
Mercedes-Benz. backrest.
Both the driver and the front passenger If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
should always observe the 45 seat backrest.
indicator lamp to determine whether or not An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
the front passenger is positioned correctly. injuries to the child in case of an accident,
Also observe the air bag display messages, instead of increasing protection for the child.
which appear in the instrument cluster Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
(Y page 235). installation of child restraint systems.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag The 45 indicator lamp lights up:
will also deploy. Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock
The OCS may have detected that the seat: to position 1 or 2
Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop
typical child up to twelve months old, button once or twice on vehicles with
seated in a child restraint system KEYLESS-GO
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-
young teenager or a small adult passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint occupant as an adult
system whose weight is greater than that The 45 indicator lamp goes out
of a typical twelve month old child. after approximately six seconds.
These are examples of when the OCS If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. detects that the front-passenger seat is
Deactivation takes place although the empty, the 45 indicator lamp will
collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the continue to light up. The 45 front-
driver's air bag. passenger front air bag warning lamp then
For further information, see "Air bag display stays lit continuously.
messages" (Y page 235). For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System self-test System" (Y page 50).
G WARNING
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Z
50 Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Safety
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning.
indicator lamp lights up X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
and stays on. specialist workshop.
The person on the X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
front-passenger seat: display (Y page 235).
Rhas the weight of a
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child

The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning.
indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
light up and/or does child seat.
not stay on. X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
The front-passenger X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
seat is: the seat.
Runoccupied X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS
Roccupied with a checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
weight up to that of a Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat as long as
typical twelve- the OCS is not functioning.
month-old child in a X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
standard child display (Y page 235).
restraint system
Occupant safety 51
Roll bar (Cabriolet) deployed, or they can prevent this completely.

The NECK-PRO head restraints or side impact
G DANGER air bags/pelvis air bags can therefore not
If the roll bar is malfunctioning, the A provide the intended protection. Do not use
Malfunction Service Required message any seat or head restraint covers.
appears in the multifunction display. The roll
Safety
bars will then possibly not be extended in the G WARNING
event of an accident. This could result in For your protection, drive only with properly
severe or even fatal injuries to you and other positioned head restraints.
occupants. In this case, visit a qualified
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
specialist workshop immediately and have
to the head as possible and the center of the
the roll bar checked.
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
G WARNING injury to the head and neck in the event of an
Ensure that the area around the roll bars/rear accident or similar situation.
head restraints is kept clear. Otherwise,
someone could be injured by the roll bars G WARNING
when they are triggered.
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO head
The roll bars are under the rear head restraints checked at a qualified specialist
restraints. They are extended if systems workshop after a rear-end collision.
detect that the vehicle is in danger of
The NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the
overturning.
likelihood of head and chest injuries. The
When the roll bars are extended, the rear NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and
head restraints also extend automatically. front-passenger seats are moved forwards
Once the roll bars are extended, you can no and upwards in the event of a rear-end
longer lower the rear head restraints. The soft collision of a certain severity. This provides
top can no longer be closed. In this case, visit better head support.
the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been
triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO
head restraints on the driver’s and front-
NECK-PRO head restraints
passenger seat (Y page 51). Otherwise, the
Important safety notes additional protection will not be available in
the event of another rear-end collision. You
G WARNING can recognize when NECK-PRO head
Do not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers) restraints have been triggered by the fact that
on the NECK-PRO head restraints. Otherwise, they have moved forwards and can no longer
the NECK-PRO head restraints may not be adjusted.
function properly, or in the event of a rear-end
collision may not be able offer the level of Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
protection they are designed to provide. restraints
G WARNING G WARNING
Seat or head restraint covers can cause a When pushing back the NECK-PRO head
malfunction when the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do
restraints are activated or when the side not become caught between the head
impact air bags or pelvis air bags are
Z
52 Occupant safety
restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to G WARNING

observe this could result in injuries. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you adjust the seat.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the

Safety
footwell or behind the seats when resetting

the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous
situations.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency
NECK-PRO head restraint (example: Coupe)
braking situations
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS
cushion forwards in the direction of PLUS intervenes powerfully
arrow :.
Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
radar sensor system detects an imminent
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as danger of collision in certain situations
it will go. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint physical limits are exceeded and the
cushion back in the direction of arrow = vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
until the cushion engages. PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
X Repeat this procedure for the second depending on the hazardous situation
NECK-PRO head restraint. detected:
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
requires a lot of strength. If you have Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is
difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head in an unfavorable position.
restraints, have this work carried out at a Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the
qualified specialist workshop. seat cushion and seat backrest of the front
multicontour seats is increased.
RCoupe: if the vehicle skids, the panorama
PRE-SAFE® system roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the
G WARNING front side windows are closed so that only
a small gap remains.
The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of
RCabriolet: if the vehicle skids, the front side
an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as
their seat belts have been fastened correctly. windows are closed so that only a small gap
Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE- remains.
SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the If the hazardous situation passes without
event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
should therefore always drive carefully and the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the
adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, side bolsters on the multicontour seat is
weather and traffic conditions. reduced again. All settings made by PRE-
SAFE® can then be reversed.
Occupant safety 53
If the seat belts are not released: possible and the seat belt is properly
X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but positioned on the body.
only when the vehicle is stationary.
The belt pretensioning is reduced and the G WARNING
locking mechanism is released. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
Safety
More information about seat belt adjustment, there are seat belts available. Make sure
a convenience function integrated into PRE- everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
SAFE®, can be found under "Seat belt
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
adjustment" (Y page 56).
time.
Seat belts G WARNING

Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
Important safety notes that have been subjected to a load in an
accident replaced and the anchorages
G WARNING checked.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Only use seat belts that have been approved
Always make sure all of your passengers are by Mercedes-Benz.
properly restrained. You and your passengers
Never tamper with seat belts. This can result
should always wear seat belts.
in the unintended deployment of the
Failure to wear and properly fasten and Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure
position your seat belt greatly increases your to deploy when necessary.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may
accident.
severely weaken them. In the event of a
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can collision, they may be unable to provide
be considerably more severe without your adequate protection.
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
Have all work carried out only by qualified
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
technicians. Consult a qualified specialist
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
workshop.
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or The use of seat belts and infant and child
death is lessened if you are properly wearing restraint systems is required by law in:
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
Rall 50 states
as intended if the occupants are properly
RU.S. territories
wearing their seat belts.
Rthe District of Columbia
G WARNING Rall Canadian provinces
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Even where this is not required by law, all
backrest in an excessively reclined position as vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
this can be dangerous. You could slide under their seat belts before starting the journey.
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the i See "Children in the vehicle"
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious (Y page 58) for further information on
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and infants and children traveling in the vehicle
seat belt provide the best restraint when the as well as on child restraint systems.
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
Z
54 Occupant safety
Correct use of the seat belts the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
G WARNING a crash.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
RSeat belts can only work when used breakable objects in or on your clothing,
Safety
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
way than as described in this section, as these might cause injuries.
that could result in serious injuries in the RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
event of an accident. snugly. Take special care of this when
REach occupant should wear their seat belt wearing loose clothing.
at all times, because seat belts help reduce RNever use a seat belt for more than one
the likelihood of and potential severity of person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. around a person and another person or
The integrated restraint system includes other objects at the same time.
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
bag, front-passenger front air bag, pelvis air
crash, you would not have the full width of
bags, side impact air bags, Coupe: window
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
curtain air bags for side windows, Cabriolet:
The twisted seat belt against your body
head bags), Emergency Tensioning Devices
could cause injuries.
(ETDs), seat belt force limiters, and front
RPregnant women should also always use a
seat knee bolsters.
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
The system is designed to enhance the
should be positioned as low as possible on
protection offered to properly belted
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
the abdomen.
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
(side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts as upright as possible.
which exceed preset deployment RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window sure it is properly positioned.
curtain air bags and ETDs). RNever place your feet on the instrument
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. keep both feet on the floor in front of the
In a frontal crash, your body would move seat.
too far forward. That would increase the RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
belt would also apply too much force to the booster seats, always follow the child seat
ribs or abdomen, which could severely manufacturer's instructions.
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen. G WARNING
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
section is located as close as possible to could tear.
the middle of the shoulder. It should not Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
portion of the seat belt under your arm. This could damage the seat belt.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
Occupant safety 55
Never attempt to make modifications to seat respective door is closed and the SmartKey
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of is turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
the seat belts.
Fastening seat belts
Safety
G WARNING
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and You can also extend seat-belt extender : by
properly secured in an appropriately sized using the seat-belt extender button in the
child restraint system or booster seat center console.
recommended for the size and weight of the X Press the seat-belt extender button.
child. For additional information, see the Seat-belt extender : extends.
"Children in the vehicle" section.
Seat-belt extender : is retracted again if:
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ buckle.
or the child is not properly secured in the child Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
restraint. belt buckle within 60 seconds.
Rthe respective door is opened.
G WARNING Rthe SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the
Seat belt presenter : must be retracted ignition lock.
while the vehicle is in motion. Only when seat Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it
belt presenter : is retracted can the seat forwards.
belt be properly positioned on the body and Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
protect the occupant as intended.
after, approximately five seconds.
If you press the seat-belt extender button
after this, seat-belt extender : will not
extend.
Seat-belt extender (example: Coupe)

The seat-belt extender for the driver and front
passenger helps you fasten your seat belt.
Seat-belt extender : is extended when the
Z
56 Occupant safety
Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Safety
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt

buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and you then engage the belt tongue
in the buckle once the seat-belt extender
has retracted.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
Example: Coupe
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
an almost vertical position (Y page 106). adjustment on and off in the on-board
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt computer (Y page 227).
extender :. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
section of the seat belt across the middle information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
of your shoulder and the lap section across under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
your pelvis. protection)" (Y page 52).
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the Releasing seat belts
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 56). up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
mechanism. This could damage the door,
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt the door trim panel and the seat belt.
across your body. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are their protective function and must be
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
securely fasten child restraint systems in the workshop.
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor"
(Y page 61).
For more information about releasing the seat
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 56).
Occupant safety 57
up to 60 seconds or until the driver's or

front-passenger seat belt is fastened.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
Safety
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases after 60 seconds
even if the driver or front passenger has still
not fastened their seat belt. The 7 seat
belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains
illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
Example: Coupe The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. out if:
X Rboth the driver and the front passenger
Slide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
guide :. have fastened their seat belts.
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger i For more information on the 7 seat
Regardless of whether the driver's and front- belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
passenger seat belts have already been indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp seat belts" (Y page 257).
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out if the driver and Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
the front passenger have fastened their seat force limiters
belts.
G WARNING
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
the engine is started, an additional warning
that have been deployed must be renewed.
tone will sound. The warning tone goes out
after approximately six seconds or once the For your safety, when disposing of Emergency
driver's seat belt is fastened. Tensioning Devices, always observe the
safety instructions. These are available from
If after six seconds the driver or front
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
warning lamp lights up: operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
not require replacement after activation.
Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat
belt is fastened ! If the front-passenger seat is not
Ronce the vehicle has exceeded a speed of occupied, do not engage the seat belt
15 mph (25 km/h), in addition a warning tongue in the buckle on the front-
tone will sound with increasing intensity for passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
Z
58 Children in the vehicle
Tensioning Device could be triggered in the decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a

event of an accident. lateral direction
The seat belts are equipped with Emergency RCabriolet: in certain situations if the vehicle
Tensioning Devices and belt force limiters. overturns and the system determines that
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, it can provide additional protection
Safety
pulling them close against the body. If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat and a small amount of powder may also be
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
released generally does not constitute a
towards the backrest.
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat lights up.
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle Automatic comfort-fit feature
occupant is reduced.
When triggered, seat belt force limiters help The front seat belts have an automatic
to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat comfort-fit feature. The automatic comfort-fit
belt on the vehicle occupant. feature reduces the retraction force of the
seat belts. This results in increased seat belt
The belt force limiters for the front seats are
comfort.
synchronized with the front air bags, which
take on a part of the deceleration force. This
results in the force exerted on the occupant
being distributed over a greater area.
Children in the vehicle
The ETDs can only be activated when: Child restraint systems
Rthe ignition is switched on. Important safety notes
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 39). G WARNING
R According to accident statistics, children are
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on safer when properly restrained in the rear
each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front. seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
possible. Regardless of seating position,
the front-passenger side.
children 12 years old and under must be
The ETDs on the seats in the rear seated and properly secured in an appropriate
compartment are triggered independently of infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
the lock status of the seat belts. seat recommended for the size and weight of
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type the child.
and severity of an accident: The infant or child restraint must be properly
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
collision, the vehicle decelerates or belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
direction during the initial stages of the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
impact Occupants, especially children, should always
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
opposite the impact the vehicle properly and use an appropriately sized infant
Children in the vehicle 59
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat remains out, do not transport a child on the
recommended for the size and weight of the front passenger seat until the system has
child. been repaired.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
an inflating air bag. Note the following front passenger seat will be seriously
Safety
important information when circumstances injured or even killed if the front passenger
require you to place a child in the front front air bag inflates.
passenger seat: RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag facing child restraint on the front passenger
technology designed to deactivate the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
passenger front air bag in your vehicle use the proper child restraint
when the system senses the weight of a recommended for the age, size and weight
typical 12-month-old child or less along of the child, and secure child restraint with
with the weight of a standard appropriate the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child restraint on the front passenger seat. child seat manufacturer's instructions.
RFor children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger G WARNING
front air bag may or may not be activated. Infants and small children should never share
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front of an accident, they could be crushed
passenger front air bag is deactivated. between the occupant and seat belt.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
front passenger seat will be seriously significantly increased if the child restraints
injured or even killed if the front passenger are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
front air bag inflates in a collision which or the child is not properly secured in the child
could occur under some circumstances, restraint.
even with the air bag technology installed Children that are too large for a child restraint
in your vehicle. The only means to must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
completely eliminate this risk is to never Position the shoulder belt across the chest
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
in the front seat. We therefore strongly may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt
recommend that you always place a child positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt
RIf you must install a rear-facing child fits properly without a booster.
restraint on the front passenger seat When the child restraint is not in use, remove
because circumstances require you to do it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator belt to prevent the child restraint from
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front becoming a projectile in the event of an
passenger front air bag is deactivated. accident.
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the 4
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
Z
G WARNING If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the RSecure the child with a child or infant seat
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take restraint system appropriate to the age and
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. weight of the child.
Do not leave children unattended in the RMake sure that the infant or child is
Safety
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child properly secured at all times while the
restraint system, or with access to an vehicle is in motion.
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
access to a vehicle could result in an accident properly secure all infants and children with
and/or serious personal injury. The children a child or infant seat restraint system for the
could: trip.
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle The use of seat belts and infant and child
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through restraint systems is required by law in:
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rall 50 states
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
RU.S. territories
vehicle equipment that can be operated
Rthe District of Columbia
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
Rall Canadian provinces
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel Infants and children must always be seated in
adjustment, or the memory function an appropriate infant or child restraint system
If children open a door, they could injure other recommended for the size and weight of the
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure child. The infant or child restraint system
themselves or be injured by following traffic. must be properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's All infant or child restraint systems must meet
metal parts, for example, could become very the following standards:
hot, and the child could be burned on these RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
parts. Standards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
G WARNING 213 and 210.2
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the An information label on the child restraint
passenger compartment or trunk unless they system indicates whether it meets these
are firmly secured in place. standards. This information is also provided
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo in the installation instructions supplied with
increases a child's risk of injury in the event the child restraint system.
of Always read and follow the manufacturer's
Rstrong braking maneuvers instructions when using an infant or child
Rsudden changes of direction restraint system or booster seat.
Ran accident Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior or on the infant or child restraint.
Further information on secure stowage of
loads can be found under "Loading
guidelines".
Children in the vehicle 61
Special seat belt retractor Position shoulder belt across the chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
G WARNING
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
If you release the seat belt when driving, the
proper seat belt positioning for children over
special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
The released seat belt cannot be engaged
Safety
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
again while driving, because the inertia reel booster.
pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The
Install the child restraint system in
child restraint system is no longer properly
accordance with the manufacturer's
secured. There is an increased risk of serious
instructions.
injury or even fatal injury.
Attach the child restraint system to both
Always keep the seat belt of the activated
securing rings.
special seat belt retractor engaged when
driving. An incorrectly installed child restraint system
could come loose during an accident and
Installing a child restraint system: seriously or even fatally injure the child.
X Always comply with the manufacturer's Child restraint systems or child seat securing
installation instructions. rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as
the result of a collision must be replaced.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
belt retractor.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is activated.
X Push down on the child restraint system to
take up any slack. Coupe
Removing a child restraint system/ Installation instructions : indicate the

deactivating the special seat belt retractor: installation location of securing rings ;.
X Always comply with the manufacturer's X To install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
installation instructions. restraint system in the Coupe: press the
X Press the seat belt release button and upholstery over both slots above securing
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. rings ; to the side.
The special seat belt retractor is
deactivated.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

in the rear
G WARNING
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Z
fulfill its function. This could cause serious or

even fatal injuries.
Safety
Cabriolet
Securing rings : are between the seat
cushion and the seat backrest.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.
Comply with the manufacturer's
instructions when installing.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX
child restraint systems are installed on the
left and right of the rear seats.
Secure child restraint systems without a
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system using the seat belts in the vehicle. The Coupe has Top Tether anchorages.
When installing child restraint systems, you Top Tether provides an additional connection
must observe the manufacturer's installation between a child restraint system, secured
instructions. with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
Top Tether of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
Top Tether anchorages
in the rear compartment behind the head
G WARNING restraints.
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their X Press down the rear of cover ; in the
upright position when the rear seats are direction of the arrow.
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat Cover ; is raised slightly at the front.
backrests in their upright position before
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
installing the Top Tether straps or when the
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure =.
that rear seat backrests are secured properly X Depending on the model and version, and
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. according to the manufacturer's
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the installation instructions, route Top Tether
seat backrest could fold forward. The child
restraint system is no longer supported
properly or held in position and can no longer
Driving safety systems 63
belt A on the left and right past head metal parts, for example, could become very
restraint :. hot, and the child could be burned on these
or parts.
X Route Top Tether belt A over the center of
the head restraint. Override feature for the rear side
Safety
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether windows
anchorage =. G WARNING
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
twisted. activate the override switch. Otherwise the
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply themselves in the rear side window.
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so. Make sure that
Top Tether belt A is tight.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
Do not leave children unattended in the If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
restraint system, or with access to an only possible using the switches in the
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off,
access to a vehicle could result in an accident operation is possible using the switches in
and/or serious personal injury. The children the rear compartment.
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through Driving safety systems
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Driving safety systems overview
vehicle equipment that can be operated In this section, you will find information about
even if the SmartKey is removed from the the following driving safety systems:
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel (Y page 64)
adjustment, or the memory function RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)
If children open a door, they could injure other RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure (Y page 65)
themselves or be injured by following traffic. RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Do not expose the child restraint system to (Y page 66)
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
Z
64 Driving safety systems
REBD (electronic brake force distribution) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
(Y page 67) immediately at a qualified specialist
RADAPTIVE BRAKE(Y page 67) workshop.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
Safety
become inoperative. Observe the information

on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 258) and
If you fail to adapt your driving style or display messages which may be shown in the
become distracted, the driving safety instrument cluster (Y page 229).
systems can neither reduce the risk of ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
accident nor override the laws of physics. that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
Driving safety systems are merely aids This allows you to continue steering the
designed to assist driving. You are vehicle when braking.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface
good time. Always adapt your driving style to
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
suit the prevailing road and weather
even if you only brake gently.
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
i The driving safety systems described only is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
work as effectively as possible when there running.
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Please pay special Braking
attention to the notes on tires,
recommended minimum tire tread depths, X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
etc. (Y page 322). brake pedal vigorously until the braking
In wintry driving conditions, always use situation is over.
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, X To make a full brake application:
snow chains. Only in this way will the depress the brake pedal with full force.
driving safety systems described in this If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
section work as effectively as possible. a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) functions as a reminder to take extra care
Important safety notes while driving.
i Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 64). BAS (Brake Assist System)
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes"
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when section (Y page 64).
braking. The steerability and braking
G WARNING
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
are deactivated. There is an increased danger in an emergency braking situation is
of skidding and accidents. increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents emergency braking situation is over.
the wheels from locking. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes
BAS operates in emergency braking function as usual, if:
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
Safety
Ryou release the brake pedal.
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
The brakes will function as usual once you collision.
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) radar sensor system must be:
i Observe the "Important safety notes" Rswitched on (Y page 226)
section (Y page 64). Roperational (Y page 242)
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in system is still available with complete brake
hazardous situations at speeds greater than boosting effect and BAS.
4 mph (7 km/h) and uses radar sensor G WARNING
technology to assess the traffic situation.
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS objects and complex traffic situations. BAS
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There
path of your vehicle for an extended period of is a risk of an accident.
time.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
BAS PLUS can also react to stationary situation and be ready to brake.
obstacles, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles, at
speeds of up to approximately 40 mph In particular, the detection of obstacles can
(70 km/h). be impaired if there is:
To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
calculates the brake force necessary if: covering the sensors
Ryou approach an obstacle, and Rsnow or heavy rain
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision Rinterference by other radar sources
For speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
apply the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS for example in parking garages
automatically increases the braking force to Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
a level suitable for the traffic conditions. motorbike
For speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h): if you Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
apply the brakes, BAS PLUS is activated. relative to the center of your vehicle
Braking is performed as late as possible.
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high G WARNING
braking force, preventative passenger BAS PLUS does not react:
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are Rto people or animals
activated simultaneously. Rto oncoming vehicles
Z
Rto crossing traffic Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your

Rwhen cornering vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is
important that you observe the notes on
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
ESP®(Y page 316).
critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
Safety
Always pay careful attention to the traffic in the instrument cluster lights up
situation and be ready to brake. continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
Following damage to the front end of the warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
vehicle, have the configuration and operation available due to a malfunction.
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified Observe the information on warning lamps
specialist workshop. This also applies to (Y page 259) and display messages which
collisions at low speeds where there is no may be shown in the instrument cluster
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. (Y page 229).
i This device has been approved by the FCC If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar from the direction desired by the driver, one
sensor is intended for use in an automotive or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
radar system only. Removing, altering or vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
tampering with the device will void any keep the vehicle on the desired course within
warranties, and is not permitted by the physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
device in any non-approved way. can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
Any unauthorized modification to this If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
device could void the user's authority to lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) circumstances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
as necessary when pulling away.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" X Adapt your driving style to suit the
section (Y page 64). prevailing road and weather conditions.
G WARNING i Only use wheels with the recommended
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further properly.
driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Traction control is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the individually if they spin. This enables you to
ignition when the parking brake is being pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
tested on a brake dynamometer. for example if the road surface is slippery on
Application of the brakes by ESP® may one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more
otherwise destroy the brake system.
drive torque is also transferred to the wheel If you deactivate ESP®:

or wheels with traction. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Traction control remains active if you Rtraction control is still activated.
deactivate ESP®.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Safety
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive
G WARNING wheels are able to spin. The spinning
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer wheels produce a cutting effect for better
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased traction.
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
EBD (electronic brake force
described in the following.
distribution)
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an i Observe the "Important safety notes"
extended period with ESP® deactivated. section (Y page 64).
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
G WARNING
X To deactivate: (Y page 222). If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
instrument cluster lights up. increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
X To activate: (Y page 222). You should therefore adapt your driving style
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the to the different handling characteristics. Have
instrument cluster goes out. the brake system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started. Observe information regarding indicator and
The ECO start/stop function switches the warning lamps (Y page 258) as well as
engine off automatically if the vehicle stops display messages (Y page 230).
moving. The engine starts automatically when EBD monitors and controls the brake
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® pressure on the rear wheels to improve
remains in its previously selected status. driving stability while braking.
Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the
engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on ADAPTIVE BRAKE
again.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels and offers increased braking comfort. In
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
the instrument cluster flashes. In such BRAKE also has the HOLD function
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. (Y page 189) and hill start assist
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the (Y page 153).
following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Rindeep snow
Ron sand or gravel i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 64).
Z
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles With the help of the radar sensor system,
with DISTRONIC PLUS. PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize are in front of your vehicle for an extended
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or period of time.
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- At speeds of up to 40 mph (70 km/h), PRE-
Safety
SAFE® Brake detects a risk of collision, you SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary
will be warned visually and acoustically as obstacles, for example, stopped or parked
well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® vehicles.
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®
intervention. Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system
Above a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this will alert you both visually and acoustically. If
function warns you if you are very quickly you do not brake or take evasive action, the
approaching a vehicle in front. An system will warn you by automatically braking
intermittent warning tone will then sound and the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk
the · distance warning lamp will light up of collision, preventive passenger protection
in the instrument cluster. measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated
X Brake immediately in order to increase the (Y page 52). If, at speeds over 20 mph
distance from the vehicle in front. (30 km/h), a risk of collision remains and you
do not brake, take evasive action or
or
significantly accelerate, automatic braking
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
may be performed up to the level of
so. emergency braking. Automatic emergency
If the driver and front passenger have their braking is not performed until immediately
seat belt fastened, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also prior to an accident that can no longer be
brake the vehicle automatically at speeds avoided.
from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) to
G WARNING
approximately 124 mph (200 km/h).
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
vehicle by a partial application of the brakes
complicated driving conditions may cause
if a danger of collision is detected. There may
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
be a collision unless you also brake.
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
SAFE® Brake at any time by: Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further take evasive action.
Ractivating kickdown
Rreleasing the brake pedal. G WARNING
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
ended automatically if: identify objects and complex traffic
conditions.
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
front of your vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when
situation and be ready to brake, especially if driving, the radar sensor system must be
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the switched on (Y page 226) and be
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. operational.
Following damage to the front end of the
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
Safety
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
be impaired if there is: of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else specialist workshop. This also applies to
covering the sensors collisions at low speeds where there is no
Rsnow or heavy rain visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Rinterference by other radar sources i USA only: This device has been approved
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
for example in parking garages The radar sensor is intended for use in an
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a automotive radar system only. Removing,
motorbike altering or tampering with the device will
void any warranties, and is not permitted
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or
relative to the center of your vehicle use the device in any non-approved way.
G WARNING Any unauthorized modification to this
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: device could void the user's authority to
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles i Canada only: This device complies with
Rto crossing traffic RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Rwhen cornering
1. This device may not cause interference,
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither and
give warnings nor intervene in all critical
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
received, including interference that may
Always pay careful attention to the traffic cause undesired operation of the device.
situation and be ready to brake.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
In order to maintain the appropriate distance device will void any warranties, and is not
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. the device in any non-approved way.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-
board computer (Y page 222).
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the
Ä symbol appears in the multifunction
display, as long as the HOLD function is
deactivated (Y page 189). On vehicles with
the Active Parking Assist driving system,
the Ä symbol is displayed when position
P is engaged or you are driving faster than
22 mph (35 km/h).
Z
70 Theft deterrent locking system
Theft deterrent locking system A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Immobilizer Ra door
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe trunk lid
Safety
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

Rthe hood
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To turn the alarm off with the
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
SmartKey: press the % or & button
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from on the SmartKey.
being started without the correct SmartKey. The alarm is switched off.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the or
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Anyone can start the engine if a valid The alarm is switched off.
SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
i The immobilizer is always deactivated grasp the outside door handle. The
when you start the engine. SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
In the event that the engine cannot be The alarm is switched off.
started when the starter battery is fully or
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. X Press the Start/Stop button on the
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
the vehicle.
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) close the open door that has triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
call to the Customer Assistance center
automatically. The emergency call system
initiates the call provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/
TELEAID Service.
Rthe mbrace/TELEAID Service has been
activated properly.
Rthe required mobile phone, power supply
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO. and GPS are available.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
71
Useful information .............................. 72

SmartKey ............................................. 72
Doors .................................................... 79
Trunk .................................................... 81
Side windows ...................................... 84
Soft top (Cabriolet) ............................. 89
Sliding sunroof (Coupe) .................... 100
Opening/closing
72 SmartKey
Useful information hot, and a child could be burned on these

parts.
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional G WARNUNG
equipment of your vehicle available at the If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the
time of publication of the Operator's weight acting on the SmartKey could cause it
Manual. Country-specific differences are to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the
possible. Please note that your vehicle may steering wheel. This could cause the engine
Opening/closing
not be equipped with all features to be switched off suddenly. You could lose
described. This also applies to safety- control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
related systems and functions. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to
i Read the information on qualified the SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
SmartKey FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Important safety notes 1. This device may not cause interference,
and
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 2. this device must accept any interference
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take received, including interference that may
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. cause undesired operation.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the Any unauthorized modification to this
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child device could void the user's authority to
restraint system, and do not give them access operate the equipment.
to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised The Product label with FCC ID and IC
access to a vehicle could result in an accident certification number can be found in the
and/or serious personal injury. They could: battery case of the SmartKey.
Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts i Canada only:
Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme This device complies with RSS-210 of
heat or cold Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with the following two conditions:
vehicle equipment that may still be in 1. This device may not cause interference,
operation even after the SmartKey has and
been removed from the ignition, such as the 2. this device must accept any interference
seat adjustment, steering wheel received, including interference that may
adjustment or memory function. cause undesired operation.
If children open a door, they could cause Any unauthorized modification to this
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if device could void the user's authority to
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure operate the equipment.
themselves when doing so or be seriously or
even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
metal parts, for example, could become very
SmartKey 73
The Product label with FCC ID and IC When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.
certification number can be found in the When locking, they flash three times.
battery case of the SmartKey. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
RDo not keep the SmartKey: that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
- signal can be activated and deactivated using
phone or another SmartKey the on-board computer (Y page 226).
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
Opening/closing
foil
computer (Y page 225).
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can affect the SmartKey's
functionality. KEYLESS-GO
Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote General notes
control function could be affected. Bear in mind that the engine can be started
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
SmartKey functions
Locking and unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. When you touch the
surface of the sensors on the vehicle's
outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO
establishes a radio connection between the
vehicle and the SmartKey. When the engine
is started and whilst you are driving,
KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid
: & To lock the vehicle SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
establishing radio contact.
; F To unlock the trunk lid
You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions
= % To unlock the vehicle
with those of a conventional key, e.g. using
X To unlock centrally: press the % KEYLESS-GO to unlock and pressing the
button. & button to lock.
If you do not open the vehicle within When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: the distance between the SmartKey and the
Rthe vehicle is locked again. corresponding door handle must not be
greater than 3 ft (1 m).
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is
armed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
Z
74 SmartKey
The SmartKey now functions as follows:

X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as

Opening/closing
follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner inner surface of the door handle on the
surface of the door handle. driver's door.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface :. surface of the front-passenger door handle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
recessed sensor surface ; for an surface on one of the door handles.

extended period. X To restore the factory settings: press
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid and hold down the % and & buttons
handle. simultaneously for approximately six
Further information on the convenience seconds until the battery check lamp
closing feature (Y page 87). flashes twice (Y page 75).
Changing the settings of the locking Mechanical key

system General notes
You can change the settings of the locking
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
system. This means that only the driver's door
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
mechanical key.
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
frequently travel on your own. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
X To change the setting: press and hold
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
down the % and & buttons on the (Y page 70).
SmartKey simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
check lamp flashes twice (Y page 75). X To turn the alarm off with the
i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button
changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey.
vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or
Rlocks X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
Runlocks the vehicle or
X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
GO: press the Start/Stop button in the
ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
SmartKey 75
or Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the workshop.
vehicle.
Checking the battery
Removing the mechanical key
Opening/closing
X Press the & or % button.
: Release catch The battery is working properly if battery
; Mechanical key check lamp : lights up briefly.
X
The battery is discharged if battery check
Push release catch : in the direction of
lamp : does not light up briefly.
the arrow and at the same time remove
X Change the battery (Y page 75).
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
SmartKey battery pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
G WARNING i You can get a battery in any qualified
Batteries contain toxic and caustic specialist workshop.
substances. For this reason, keep batteries
out of the reach of children. Replacing the battery
If a battery has been swallowed, seek medical
help immediately. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 74).
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Observe
government disposal guidelines. California
residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Z
76 SmartKey
X Insert the front tabs of battery

compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey (Y page 74).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening/closing
: Battery compartment cover

; Mechanical key
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
= Battery
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
SmartKey 77
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening/closing
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 75).
X Lock (Y page 80) or unlock (Y page 81) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
or unlock the vehicle unlocked for a long time.
using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle and then turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 75).
the mechanical key.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
78 SmartKey

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening/closing

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 312).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 313).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles without The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

DIRECT SELECT lever X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
only: doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors 79
Doors Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
! The side windows will not open/close if
G WARNING the battery is discharged or if the side
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the windows have iced up. It will then not be
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take possible to close the door. Do not attempt
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. to force the door closed. You could
Do not leave children unsupervised in the otherwise damage the door or the side
Opening/closing
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child window.
restraint system, and do not give them access
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
even if it has been locked.
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. They could:
Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts
Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme
heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with
vehicle equipment that may still be in
operation even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the ignition, such as the
seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause X Pull door handle ;.
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure up. The door is unlocked and can be
themselves when doing so or be seriously or opened.
i When a door is opened, the side window
on that side opens slightly. When the door
is closed, the side window closes again.
hot, and a child could be burned on these
parts.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
passenger compartment or trunk unless they from the inside.
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child's risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong braking maneuvers
Rsudden changes of direction
Ran accident
Z
80 Doors
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
i If you press one of the two buttons and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
Opening/closing
The vehicle is locked automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
X To unlock: press button :.
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
X To lock: press button ;.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can also switch the automatic locking
The central locking/unlocking button does function on and off using the on-board
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. computer (Y page 225).
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
Unlocking the driver's door
If the vehicle has been locked using the (mechanical key)
locking button for the central locking, or has
been locked automatically, and a door is If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
opened from the inside: the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Rthe X Take the mechanical key out of the
vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked SmartKey (Y page 74).
Ronly the door which has been opened form X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's the driver's door as far as it will go.
door had been previously unlocked
Automatic locking feature
1 To unlock
Trunk 81
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
to position 1. are locked.
The door is unlocked. X Insert the mechanical key into the
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove SmartKey.
it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey. Trunk
Opening/closing
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and Important safety notes
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 70). G WARNING
Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
in unconsciousness and death.
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
X Open the driver's door.
G WARNING
X Close the front-passenger door and the
trunk lid. SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
X Press the locking button (Y page 79). the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
X Check whether the locking knob on the Do not leave children unsupervised in the
front-passenger door is still visible. If vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
necessary, press the locking knob down by restraint system, and do not give them access
hand (Y page 79). to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
X Close the driver's door. access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. They could:
SmartKey (Y page 74). Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme
the driver's door as far as it will go. heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with
vehicle equipment that may still be in
operation even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the ignition, such as the
seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or
1 Locking Do not expose the child restraint system to
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
as it will go to position 1. metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and a child could be burned on these
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
parts.
it.
Z
82 Trunk
G WARNING X Press the % button on the SmartKey.

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the X Pull handle :.
passenger compartment or trunk unless they X Raise the trunk lid.
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo Closing
increases a child's risk of injury in the event
of G WARNING
To prevent possible personal injury, always
Opening/closing
Rstrong braking maneuvers

Rsudden keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
changes of direction
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
Ran accident
especially careful when small children are
around.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 367).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The trunk lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
Rlocked separately
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
Ropened with the emergency release button
the & button on the SmartKey
Runlocked with the mechanical key
(Y page 73) or with KEYLESS-GO
(Y page 73).
Opening/closing from outside i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
Opening then opens again.
Opening automatically from the

outside
G WARNING
Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting
in unconsciousness and death.
Trunk 83
! The trunk lid swings upwards when Locking the trunk separately
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid remains locked and cannot be opened.
(Y page 367). X Close the trunk lid.
Opening SmartKey (Y page 74).
Opening/closing
You can unlock and open the trunk lid
simultaneously with the SmartKey.
X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
Opening automatically from the

inside
G WARNING 1 Basic position
Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the 2 Locking
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting lock as far as the stop.
in unconsciousness and death. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
position 1 to position 2.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid X Remove the mechanical key.
(Y page 367).
SmartKey.
Opening
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)

! The trunk lid swings upwards when
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
X To open: pull remote operating switch for will be triggered (Y page 70).
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's SmartKey (Y page 74).
seat when the vehicle is stationary and X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
unlocked. lock as far as the stop.
Z
84 Side windows
The trunk lid emergency release does not

open the trunk lid if the battery is
disconnected or discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
Opening/closing
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
1 Neutral position. Side windows

2 To unlock
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
from position 1 as far as it will go to G WARNING
position 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk When opening or closing the door windows,
lid handle. make sure that there is no danger of anyone
The trunk is unlocked. being harmed by the opening/closing
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
procedure.
1 and remove it. The front door windows are equipped with
automatic operation and the anti-entrapment
feature. If in automatic mode a front door
SmartKey.
window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path, the anti-entrapment feature
will stop the door window and open it slightly.
Trunk emergency release
The door windows operate differently when
You can open the trunk lid from inside the the switch is pulled. See the "Problems with
vehicle with the emergency release button. door windows" section for details.
The closing of the front door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
X Press emergency release button : briefly. opening.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened G WARNING
with the trunk lid emergency release when Do not keep any part of your body up against
the vehicle is stationary or while driving. the window pane when opening a window. The
downward motion of the pane may pull that
part of your body down between the window
Side windows 85
pane and the door frame and trap it there. If available for up to five minutes or until the
there is a risk of entrapment, release the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
switch and pull it to close the window. i When the override feature for the side
windows is activated (Y page 63), the side
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
Opening and closing the side
windows
Opening and closing all side windows
Opening/closing
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on (Cabriolet)
the front-passenger door as well as on the Using the switch on the center console
doors in the rear compartment on the left and
right-hand sides for the respective side You can use the button on the center console
window. to close all side windows simultaneously.
The switches on the driver's door take X Open the cover in the lower center console.
precedence. The switch for all side windows is under the
cover.
: Front left
; Front right X To open all side windows: press
= Rear right switch : to the point of resistance.
? Rear left X To open all side windows fully: press
X
switch : beyond the point of resistance.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock. X To close all side windows: pull
X To open: press the corresponding switch. switch :.

X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
i You can start automatic operation when Using the SmartKey
opening and closing the front door windows G WARNING
and when opening the rear door windows. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
To do so, briefly press or pull the switch to as you close the side windows.
beyond the point of resistance in the
relevant direction. You can stop automatic Proceed as follows if there is a risk of
operation by pressing or pulling again. entrapment:
Rrelease the & key.
i You can continue to operate the side
Rpress and hold the % key until the side
windows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is windows open again.
Z
86 Side windows
You can use the SmartKey to open or close

all side windows simultaneously.
X Close the soft top (Y page 90).
X Open the trunk partition (Y page 96).
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on
the driver's door.
Opening/closing
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the

SmartKey must be within 6 ft (2 m) of the
vehicle.
X To open all side windows: press XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
the % button on the SmartKey until the door handle until the side windows are fully
side windows are fully opened. closed.
X To interrupt the opening procedure: i Make sure you only touch recessed
release the % button. sensor surface :.
X To close all side windows: press the X Make sure that all the side windows are
& button on the SmartKey until the side closed.
windows are fully closed. X To interrupt convenience closing:
X To interrupt the closing procedure: release recessed sensor surface : on the
release the & button. door handle.
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO

Convenience opening (Coupe)
G WARNING
When using the convenience closing feature, General notes
make sure that nobody can become trapped. You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
Proceed as follows if there is a risk of driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
entrapment: carry out the following functions
Rrelease the locking button on the door simultaneously:
handle. Runlock the vehicle
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold Ropen the side windows
it. Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
The side windows open. sliding panel and the roller sunblind
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side driver's seat
windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO
key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors i The convenience opening feature can
must be closed. only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
Side windows 87
Convenience opening When you lock the vehicle, you can

simultaneously:
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle. Rclose the side windows
X Press and hold the % button until the Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/
side windows and the panorama roof with sliding panel
power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
position. tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
Opening/closing
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof roller sunblind.
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first. Using the SmartKey
X Press and hold the % button again until
The SmartKey must be close to the driver's
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding door handle.
panel is in the desired position.
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
X To interrupt convenience opening:
door handle.
release the % button.
X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
Convenience closing (Coupe)
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Important safety notes panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed.
G WARNING
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
When closing the windows and the panorama
tilt/sliding panel:
roof with power tilt/sliding panel, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by X Press and hold the & button again until
the closing procedure. the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: with power tilt/sliding panel closes.
RRelease button & to stop the closing X To interrupt convenience closing:
procedure. To open, press and hold button release the & button.
%. To continue the closing procedure
after making sure that there is no danger of Using KEYLESS-GO
anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure, press and hold button &. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the sensor surface on the outside
door handle to stop the closing procedure.
RImmediately pull on the same outside door
handle and hold firmly. The windows and
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel will open for as long as the door
handle is held but the door not opened.
Z
88 Side windows
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle until the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Opening/closing
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind
of the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel closes.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 85).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 85).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Soft top (Cabriolet) 89
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead
to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side
windows.
G WARNING
Opening/closing
Pulling and holding the switch to close the window immediately after it had been blocked two
times will cause the window to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold
the switch.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Soft top (Cabriolet) A warning tone sounds shortly beforehand.

The Convertible Top Opening/Closing
Important safety notes Not Finished message appears in the
G WARNING multifunction display.
Only drive with the soft top fully open or Lock the soft top again before driving on.
closed. Otherwise, the unlocked soft top could open
during the journey and cause you to lose
If the soft top does not open or close fully, the
control of your vehicle. You or other persons
soft-top hydraulics are depressurized and the
could be injured as a result.
soft top is lowered:
Rafter about seven minutes if the ignition is
! Never sit on the soft-top compartment
switched on cover and do not store any heavy objects
Rimmediately if the ignition is switched off on it. You will otherwise damage the soft
Z
90 Soft top (Cabriolet)
top and soft-top compartment cover of the Release the soft-top switch in the event of
vehicle. danger. The soft-top mechanism stops
! When opening and closing the soft top, immediately.
make sure that:
G WARNING
Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, as
The soft top stops moving during the opening
the soft top swings upwards
or closing procedure if you drive faster than
Rthe trunk partition is closed.
25 mph (40 km/h). This could impair your rear
Opening/closing
Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the view. At high speeds the soft top may be
trunk partition. damaged.
Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by Reduce your speed to below 25 mph
the load. (40 km/h) or stop in accordance with traffic
Rthe trunk lid is closed. conditions. Press or pull the soft-top switch
Rno objects are on the soft-top again in order to open or close the soft top
compartment cover fully.
Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen.
You could otherwise damage the soft top, Opening/closing

trunk and other parts of the vehicle. X Make sure that the trunk partition is closed
i Make sure that the soft top is dry and (Y page 96).
clean before closing it. Otherwise, water or X Close the trunk lid.
dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
You can open or close the soft top: ignition lock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.
Rwhen the vehicle is stationary or
Rwhen the speed does not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
If there is a strong head wind, it may not be
possible to close the soft top fully. In this
case, reduce speed or stop in order to close
the soft top fully.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only open or close the
soft top when the vehicle is stationary.
X To open: pull soft-top switch : until the

Opening and closing with the soft top
switch entire soft top is stowed away in the trunk.
The Convertible Top in Operation
Important safety notes message appears in the multifunction
display.
G WARNING If you drive faster than 25 mph (40 km/h)
Make sure nobody can be trapped or injured during the opening procedure, the opening
by moving parts, such as the soft-top linkage procedure is stopped and the Open/Close
or soft-top compartment cover, when opening Convertible Top Completely message
or closing the soft top. is displayed in the multifunction display. To
fully open the soft top, reduce speed back
to under 25 mph (40 km/h) and pull the display. The seat ventilation is switched on.
soft top switch again. The rear side windows open.
X To close: press and hold soft-top X To close: press and hold the & button
switch : until the soft top is fully closed. on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully
The Convertible Top in Operation closed.
message appears in the multifunction The Convertible Top in Operation
display. message appears in the multifunction
If you drive faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) display. The soft top and the side windows
Opening/closing
during the closing procedure, the closing close.
procedure is stopped and the Open/Close
Convertible Top Completely message
is displayed in the multifunction display. To Closing the soft top manually
fully close the soft top, reduce speed back
to under 25 mph (40 km/h) and push the Important safety notes
soft top switch again. G WARNING
Remove wristwatches and any jewelry such
as rings or bracelets. You could otherwise get
Opening and closing using the caught, be injured and damage the vehicle.
SmartKey
Always grip the soft top at the indicated
Important safety notes gripping points when closing the soft top
manually. You could otherwise be injured.
G WARNING
Make sure nobody can be trapped or injured If the soft top cannot be closed automatically,
by moving parts such as the soft-top linkage check the following points:
or soft-top compartment cover when opening RIs the trunk partition engaged
or closing the soft top. (Y page 96)?
If there is a risk of entrapment, immediately RAre the head restraints on the rear bench
release the % or & button on the seats extended?
SmartKey. The soft-top mechanism stops RIs the trunk lid closed?
immediately. RIs the on-board voltage sufficient?
Start the engine if necessary.

Opening/closing
If automatic operation still does not work, the
The SmartKey must be close to the driver's soft top can be closed manually.
door handle. To carry out this work, you will need the
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's assistance of another person.
door handle. i Closing the soft top manually is a
X To open: press and hold the % button complex, technically demanding process
on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully which requires a great deal of force. Only
opened. close the soft top manually in extreme
The Convertible Top in Operation emergencies. Preferably, contact a
message appears in the multifunction qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Closing the soft top

X Apply the parking brake.
X Open the side windows.
X Lower the head restraints automatically or
manually, see the Digital Operator's
Manual, keyword "Head restraint".
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
Opening/closing
lock.
X Open the trunk.
X Take the two straps out of the vehicle tool
Left trim in the trunk (example)
kit (Y page 308).
X On both sides of the trunk, tear trim A
X Take the hex-socket wrench out of the
along the perforation in the direction of the
Operator's Manual wallet and keep it with
arrow.
you.
Left trim in the trunk (example)

Example: left trim in the trunk
X Pull out catch B on both sides as far as it
X Turn rotary catch : counter-clockwise
will go and turn it approximately a quarter
and fold down cover ;.
of a turn counter-clockwise.
X Make sure catch B is not drawn in again.
If this happens, pull out catch B again as
far as possible and turn it about a quarter
turn counter-clockwise.
X Insert Allen key = into valve screw ? on

the hydraulic pump.
X Turn valve screw ? of the hydraulic pump
with Allen key = counter-clockwise a full
turn.
The soft-top compartment hinges are on the

right-hand and left-hand side in the gap
between the lid of the soft-top compartment
and the trunk seal.
X Shift both levers D of soft-top
compartment hinges C forwards beyond
the detent position on both sides.
Opening/closing
XPlace straps E on the soft-top
compartment lid.
i Take the hex-socket wrench and the
SmartKey out of the trunk if necessary. You
can only access the trunk again once you
have fully closed the soft top manually.
X Close the trunk lid.
X On both sides, pull the straps through
G WARNING
behind the soft-top compartment hinges in
You could be injured during the following
the direction of the arrow.
steps of opening the soft top manually if you
X Route the straps through the created loops.
work alone. Perform the following steps
together with a second person.
! The trunk lid must be closed for the next

steps. The soft top compartment cover
could otherwise collide with the trunk lid.
XPull the straps between the soft-top

compartment hinges and the soft-top
compartment.
i Do not pull the straps as long as the trunk
is open.
X Each person takes a strap.
X Pulling with force, simultaneously lift out
the cover of the soft-top compartment
back/up by the straps in the direction of
the arrow.
G WARNING
You could become trapped or injured.
Z
Grip the soft-top compartment with one hand

and support yourself with the other hand on
the edge of the trunk lid as illustrated.
Opening/closing
X Lift the soft top out of the soft-top

compartment and guide it forwards in the
direction of the arrow onto windshield
frame H.
X One person stands on the right-hand side
and the other person on the left-hand side
of the vehicle.
X Grip the soft-top compartment with one
hand as illustrated.
X Use the other hand to support yourself on
the edge of the trunk lid as illustrated.
X Lift soft-top compartment lid F up as far
as it will go. In doing so, pull soft-top
compartment lid F to the rear, applying
constant force.
I To open
G WARNING J To lock
Do not reach between the cover halves and X Pull off the cover of the roof lock behind the
the hinges. You could otherwise become overhead control panel.
trapped.
X Insert the hex-socket wrench into the roof
lock.
X Turn the Allen key clockwise I as far as
possible.
! Make sure the Allen key is turned counter-
clockwise as far as possible during the
following step. The soft top may otherwise
not be fully locked.
X Turn the Allen key counter-clockwise J as
far as possible.
The soft top is now pre-locked on the
X Reach under the tip of soft top G in the windshield frame.
soft-top compartment from the right-hand
and left-hand sides.
X With your hand flat, press down the

material tensioning frame until it rests on
soft-top support M of the soft-top
compartment lid.
X With your hand flat, press the soft-top
compartment cover forwards/downwards
on both sides simultaneously until it
engages in the guide. Apply your hands to
Opening/closing
the points indicated with arrows.
At the same time, press the material
tensioning frame gently downwards with
X Move material tensioning frame K to an your flat hand.
upright position.
! Make sure the soft-top compartment
cover does not collide with the material
tensioning frame during the following step.
X Lower soft-top compartment lid L.
G WARNING
You could trap your hands.
Do not push the soft-top compartment cover
forwards in front of the soft-top support with
your hands.
X Insert the hex-socket wrench into the roof
lock.
X Turn the Allen key counter-clockwise N as
far as possible.
X Have the soft-top mechanism repaired
immediately at a specialist workshop.
i Press the soft-top compartment lid again
if the trunk lid cannot be opened.
! Do not under any circumstances open the
trunk lid with the emergency key. You could
otherwise damage the trunk lid and the
soft-top compartment cover.
Re-locking the soft top

G WARNING
Stop the vehicle at a suitable location as soon
as it is possible to do so safely and lock the
soft top before driving on. You could
otherwise endanger yourself and others.
Z
The soft top is not locked if: Opening/closing

Rthe Convertible Top in Operation
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten
seconds when pulling away or while driving.
Locking
Opening/closing
You can lock the soft top again if it is not

locked fully.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and X To close: pull trunk partition : by the
traffic conditions. handle in the direction of the arrow until it
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the rests on the sides of the trunk.
ignition lock. trunk partition : finishes closing
X Press the soft-top switch (Y page 90). automatically.
X To open: push trunk partition : against
the direction of the arrow by the handle.
Trunk partition The trunk partition finishes opening
automatically.
General notes
! To avoid damaging the soft top or load
when folding back the soft top, observe the Brackets for the wind screen
following:
G WARNING
Rwhen the trunk partition is open, do not Fold back the top part of the wind screen if it
place any objects in or behind the net on restricts your vision or when it is dark. It could
the side that are so long they could otherwise impair your view to the rear. As a
obstruct the trunk partition or damage result of the visibility impairment, you could
the opened soft top. cause an accident and injure yourself or
Rmake sure that the cargo does not push others.
the trunk partition upwards.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
The soft top can only be opened when the
trunk partition is closed. only use wind screens which have been
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz
The trunk partition can be used to cover vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to
luggage and loads in the trunk. the vehicle.
! Observe the backrest position of the front
seats if the wind screen is installed, since
the backrest could collide with the wind
screen here.
Extending AIRCAP
Opening/closing
The wind screen protects against wind when
driving with the soft top open. It is secured
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
above the rear bench seats. For this reason,
ignition lock.
only the driver and the front passenger can
travel in the vehicle when the wind screen is
installed. X Press AIRCAP button :.
X When installing the wind screen, use lateral The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP
brackets :. button light up.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
AIRCAP
G WARNING
When extending and retracting AIRCAP, make
sure that no one can become trapped. If there
is a risk of entrapment, press the button again Wind deflector ; extends.
to retract AIRCAP again.
With AIRCAP, four people can travel

comfortably with the soft top open. AIRCAP
reduces the draft for the driver and
passengers in both the front and the rear
compartment in a vehicle with the soft top
down.
You can open or close AIRCAP either when
the vehicle is stationary or when driving up to
a speed 100 mph (160 km/h).
AIRCAP has the following components:
The head restraints on the rear bench seats
Rawind deflector between the windshield and AIRCAP wind screen = move to the
and the soft top center position simultaneously.
Ran AIRCAP wind screen between the two When a seat belt in the rear compartment is
head restraints on the rear bench seat fastened, the head restraints on the rear
Z
bench seats and AIRCAP wind screen = Before installing or removing the AIRCAP
move to the upper position. wind screen:
i If you park your vehicle with the soft top X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
down and remove the SmartKey, the wind ignition lock.
deflector and the head restraints in the rear X Open the folding roof fully (Y page 90).
compartment retract automatically. When X Extend the head restraints in the rear
you start the engine again, the wind compartment fully (Y page 109).
deflector and the head restraints in the rear
Opening/closing
compartment extend again automatically. Removing

i It is no longer possible to retract/extend
AIRCAP if you are driving faster than
100 mph (160 km/h).
Retracting AIRCAP
ignition lock.
X Press AIRCAP button :.
The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP

button go out. Wind deflector ; retracts. Bolts on the AIRCAP wind screen between the head
restraints in the rear compartment
The head restraints on the rear bench seats
X Use the 4 mm hex-socket wrench to turn
and AIRCAP wind screen = move to the
the bolts on both sides counter-clockwise
lower position simultaneously.
by about 90° and loosen them.
i If there are passengers wearing seat belts X Pull the bolts out of the brackets on the
in the rear compartment, the head head restraints.
restraints on the rear bench seats and the
AIRCAP wind screen remain in the upper
position.
Retracting the head restraints on the

rear bench seats from the driver's seat
To improve the rear view, you can retract the
head restraints on the rear bench seats
individually (Y page 109). The wind deflector
remains in its current position.
X Pull the AIRCAP wind screen out of the

Installing and removing the AIRCAP guide rails in the direction of the arrow.
wind screen Make sure that you pull the AIRCAP wind
screen forwards slightly when doing so.
Preparation
You will need a 4 mm Allen key to install/
remove the AIRCAP wind screen.
Installing
Opening/closing
X Keeping the AIRCAP wind screen
horizontal, guide it into the slot between
the head restraints in the direction of the
arrow with both racks straight down.
X Push the AIRCAP wind screen down until
the bolts are at the same height as the
brackets on the head restraints.
X Insert the bolts into the brackets on both
sides.
X Tighten the bolts with the 4 mm hex-socket
wrench until they engage.
The markings on the bolts are vertical.
Z
100 Sliding sunroof (Coupe)
Problems with the soft top

The soft top will not The ignition is not switched on.
open or close. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The trunk lid is open.

Opening/closing
X Close the trunk lid (Y page 96).
The trunk partition is not closed.

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 96).
The roll bars have been deployed.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The head restraints in the rear compartment do not retract

automatically.
X Lower the head restraints in the rear compartment manually,
see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Head restraint".
The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.

X Close the soft top manually if necessary (Y page 91).
The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.
The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety
reasons.
You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
Sliding sunroof (Coupe) is blocked during the closing procedure, the

sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.
The sliding sunroof operates differently when
G WARNING the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.
When opening or closing the sliding sunroof, See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof"
make sure that there is no danger of anyone section for more details.
being harmed by the opening/closing The opening/closing procedure of the sliding
procedure. sunroof can be immediately halted by
The sliding sunroof is equipped with releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the
automatic operation and the anti-entrapment sliding sunroof switch was moved past the
feature. If the movement of the sliding sunroof resistance point and released, by moving the
sliding sunroof switch in any direction.
Sliding sunroof (Coupe) 101
G WARNING Operating the panorama roof with

The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the power tilt/sliding panel
event of an accident, the glass may shatter.
This may result in an opening in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
Opening/closing
occupants wearing their seat belts properly,
as entire body parts or portions of them may
protrude from the passenger compartment.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free

of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions Overhead control panel
may occur. : To raise
Do not allow anything to protrude from the ; To open
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could = To close/lower
be damaged.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
! The weather can change abruptly. It could panel can only be operated when the roller
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sunblind is open.
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
damaged if water enters the vehicle
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
interior.
corresponding direction.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
closing process is started in the
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
corresponding direction. You can stop
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
automatic operation by operating the
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
switch again.
eliminate these noises.
In this section, the term "sliding sunroof"
refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/ Operating the roller sunblind for the
sliding panel. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
G WARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
make sure that no one can be injured.
The roller sunblind has automatic operation
and an anti-entrapment feature. If the roller
sunblind is blocked during the closing
Z
102 Sliding sunroof (Coupe)
procedure, the anti-entrapment feature stops Resetting the panorama roof with
the roller sunblind and it opens again slightly. power tilt/sliding panel and roller
The manual opening and closing of the roller sunblind
sunblind can be terminated immediately by ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/
releasing the button. In automatic operation, sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot
press the button briefly in any direction to be fully opened or closed after resetting,
stop the roller sunblind. contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Opening/closing
The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/
from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be sliding panel and the roller sunblind if the
opened and closed when the panorama roof panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. or the roller sunblind does not move
smoothly.
Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel is fully closed (Y page 102).
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
Overhead control panel X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
: To open additional second.
; To open X Make sure that the panorama roof with
= To close power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 101) and
the roller sunblind (Y page 102) can be fully
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the opened again.
ignition lock.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
above again.
corresponding direction.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
Sliding sunroof (Coupe) 103
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased
closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become
trapped when closing the sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
Opening/closing
Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof switch to close the sliding sunroof immediately after it
had been blocked two times will cause the sliding sunroof to close without the anti-entrapment
feature for as long as you hold the switch.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel.
The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
cannot be closed and again slightly:
you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and
reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment
feature.
Z
104
105
Useful information ............................ 106

Correcting the driver's seat posi-
tion ..................................................... 106
Seats .................................................. 107
Steering wheel .................................. 113
Mirrors ............................................... 115
Memory function .............................. 117
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

106 Correcting the driver's seat position
Useful information Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

vertical position.
i This Operator's Manual describes all Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
models and all standard and optional your thighs are gently supported.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
time of publication of the Operator's X Check whether the head restraint is
Manual. Country-specific differences are adjusted properly.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
When doing so, make sure that you have
not be equipped with all features
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
described. This also applies to safety-
of your head is supported at eye level by
related systems and functions.
the center of the head restraint.

i Read the information on qualified X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). wheel adjustment (Y page 113).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Correcting the driver's seat position
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 113)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 53).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 55).
The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
X Observe the safety guidelines on seat joints
adjustment (Y page 107). X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a
properly. way that you have a good view of road and
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 108) traffic conditions (Y page 115).
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Vehicles with a memory function: save
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
as possible. settings with the memory function
(Y page 117).
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Seats 107
Seats Observe the following points:

Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering
G WARNING wheel.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, position that still allows you to reach the
children should never be left unsupervised in accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
the vehicle. They could otherwise become position should be as far back as possible
trapped when adjusting the seat. with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.

G WARNING Radjust the head restraint so that it is as
Make sure that the back of your head is close to the head as possible and the center
supported at eye level by the central area of of the head restraint supports the back of
the head restraint. If your head is not the head at eye level.
supported correctly by the head restraint, you Rnever place hands under the seat or near
could suffer a severe neck injury in the event any moving parts while a seat is being
of an accident. Never drive if the head adjusted.
restraints are not engaged and set correctly.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
G WARNING
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle G WARNING
control, all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be done
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
before setting the vehicle in motion.
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
G WARNING Regardless of seating position, children 12
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. years old and under must be seated and
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause properly secured in an appropriately sized
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. child restraint system or booster seat
Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat recommended for the size and weight of the
backrest in an excessively reclined position as child. For additional information, see the
this can be dangerous. You could slide under "Children in the vehicle" section.
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
it, the seat belt would apply force at the significantly increased if the child restraints
abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts or the child is not properly secured in the child
provide the best restraint when the wearer is restraint.
in a position that is as upright as possible and
seat belts are properly positioned on the ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
body. heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
G WARNING
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you soon as possible.
can correctly fasten your seat belt. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
Z
108 Seats
heating should also not be used to dry i Further related subjects:

the seats. RThrough-loading feature in the rear
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
bench seat (Coupe) (folding the rear
see the "Interior care" section. bench seat forward) (Y page 270)
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Adjusting the seats
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating

materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible. : Head restraint height
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not ; Seat cushion angle
switch on the seat heating. The seat = Seat height
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; A Backrest angle
see "Interior care". i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the passenger seat will be moved to a better
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the position if it was previously in an
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. unfavourable position.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 117).
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating i Vehicles with the through-loading
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, feature: if you fold down a rear seat
seat covers, child seats or booster seats. backrest, the respective front seat is
moved forwards slightly in order to avoid
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
contact.
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
i The head restraints in the front seats are
installed with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 51). For this reason, it is not
possible to remove the head restraints
from the front seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
Seats 109
Adjusting the head restraints If AIRCAP is activated, the right-hand

indicator lamp on the AIRCAP button goes
Adjusting the head restraints out.
electrically X To extend: press button : again.
The head restraints only move into the

central position if AIRCAP is activated and
no rear seat belt has been fastened.
If AIRCAP is activated, the right-hand
indicator lamp on the AIRCAP button
comes on.

i More detailed information about AIRCAP
can be found on (Y page 97).
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide Manually lowering the head restraints
switch for head restraint adjustment : up in the rear (Cabriolet)
or down in the direction of the arrow.
If the head restraints in the rear compartment
are in the upper position, the soft top cannot
Rear seat head restraints
be closed fully. If the head restraint
Lowering and extending the rear seat electronics are malfunctioning and the
head restraints from the front (Cabriolet) adjustment procedure of the soft top is
interrupted leaving the soft top compartment
G WARNING cover open, you therefore have to lower the
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the rear compartment
head restraints in the raised position when manually.
the rear seats are occupied. Lower the head restraints in the rear
Keep the area around head restraints clear of compartment manually if:
articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the Rthe head restraint electronics are
folding operation of the head restraints.
malfunctioning
Rthe opening or closing procedure of the soft
top is interrupted leaving the soft top
compartment cover open.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.
X To lower: press button :.
The head restraints move to the lowest Cover ; can only be released when the
position. opening or closing procedure of the soft top
Z
110 Seats
is interrupted leaving the soft top The warning message is no longer displayed
compartment cover open. once the seat backrest engages in the locking
X Push the mechanical key into two mechanism. If both seat backrests are locked
openings : between the head restraints and the warning message continues to be
until cover ; releases. displayed, have the system checked by a
X Take off cover ;.
Mercedes-Benz Center without delay.
G WARNING
Always ensure that no-one can become
trapped or injured by the movement of the
seat. In a potentially hazardous situation, the

procedure can be interrupted by moving the
seat adjustment switch in the door control
panel or by operating one of the position
buttons of the Memory function.
Folding the seat backrest forward

X Turn thumbwheel : in the direction of the
front seat to lower the head restraints.
Folding the front-seat backrests

forward/back
G WARNING
The seat belts can only provide protection if
the seat backrest is locked in the upright Example: Coupe
position. The seat backrest must therefore be The seat moves forwards if you have folded
locked in the upright position during the the backrest forwards and the seat is in the
journey. Do not drive the vehicle if the seat rear half of the range. This makes it easier for
backrest is not locked in the upright position. passengers to get into and out of the rear
If the compartment. The head restraint is lowered
Lock Seat Backrest Front Right simultaneously.
or X Pull seat release handle : forwards and
Lock Seat Backrest Front Left fold the backrest forwards as far as it will
warning message is displayed in the go.
multifunction display, then the corresponding The seat automatically moves to the
seat backrest is not locked. Carefully slow foremost position and the head restraint is
down and drive with caution to an area which lowered.
is a safe distance from the road. Always
ensure that there is sufficient space behind
the seat backrest and fold the seat backrest
back fully until it engages in the locking
mechanism.
Seats 111
Folding the seat backrest back Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X Swing back the seat backrest.
The seat moves automatically to the stored
position.
Adjusting the multicontour seat

: To raise the backrest contour
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
: To adjust the thigh cushion
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
; To adjust the backrest contour in the
lumbar region
= To adjust the backrest contour in the Switching the seat heating on/off
upper back region
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat Activating/deactivating
backrest
G WARNING
You can adjust the contour of the front seats Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
individually so as to provide optimum support 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.
for your back and sides. The health of passengers that have limited
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
2 in the ignition lock. react to excessively high temperatures may
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
level 3 repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Z
112 Seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the heating level you have selected. indicate the ventilation level you have
The system automatically switches down selected.
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
eight minutes. 2 in the ignition lock.
The system automatically switches down X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten until the desired ventilation level is set.
minutes. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
The system automatically switches off until all the indicator lamps go out.
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position ventilation may switch off.
1 or 2 in the ignition lock. i Coupe: you can open the side windows
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly and the panorama roof with power tilt/
until the desired heating level is set. sliding panel using the "Convenience
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly opening" feature (Y page 86). The seat
until all the indicator lamps go out. ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat Cabriolet: you can open the soft top and the
heating may switch off. rear side windows with the SmartKey
(Y page 91). The seat ventilation of the
Problems with the seat heating driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
The seat heating has switched off
prematurely or cannot be switched on. The
vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low Problems with the seat ventilation
because too many electrical consumers are The seat ventilation has switched off
switched on. prematurely or cannot be switched on. The
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low
not need, such as the rear window because too many electrical consumers are
defroster or interior lighting. switched on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window
Switching the seat ventilation on/off defroster or interior lighting.
Activating/deactivating
AIRSCARF (Cabriolet)
G WARNING
Very hot air can flow out of the AIRSCARF
vents in the head restraints when AIRSCARF
is in operation. This can cause burns on
unprotected skin near the AIRSCARF vents.
Make sure that you reduce the heater output
in time.
Steering wheel 113
Steering wheel
G WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and Therefore, do not leave children unattended
neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a
restraints. vehicle could result in an accident and/or
The three red indicator lamps in the button serious personal injury.
indicate the heating level you have selected.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
position 2 in the ignition lock. Adjusting the steering wheel
X To switch on: press the : button.
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
up. The blower starts up after a preheating
phase of seven seconds.
X Press button : repeatedly until the
desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
You can use the adjustable fins on the head
restraint to adjust the height of the current of
: To adjust the steering wheel height
air blown out according to your height.
; To adjust the steering wheel position
Make sure that there are no objects covering
the intake grille on the back of the driver's (fore-and-aft adjustment)
seat backrest. i Further related subjects:
i The blower continues running for seven REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
seconds to cool down the heating (Y page 114)
elements. RStoring settings (Y page 117)
i If the battery voltage is too low, the

AIRSCARF may switch off.
Z
114 Steering wheel
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when
G WARNING you:
Make sure that nobody can become trapped Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
feature. in position 1
If there is a risk of someone becoming Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
halt the procedure:
Rpress
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
the steering column adjustment
it has not already reached the upper end
button.
stop.
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons.
Position of the steering wheel for
The steering column stops moving driving
immediately.
Do not keep the memory function position The steering wheel is moved to the last
button pressed as this will start the memory selected position when:
function and set the steering wheel and seat Rthe driver's door is closed.
in motion. Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
Do not leave children unattended in the lock.
vehicle. They could open the driver's door and or
thereby unintentionally activate the EASY- Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
When you close the driver's door with the
G WARNING
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
Let the system complete the adjustment also automatically moved to the previously
procedure before setting the vehicle in set position.
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
The last position of the steering wheel is
be completed before setting the vehicle in
stored when you switch off the ignition or
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
when you store the setting with the memory
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
function (Y page 117).
control of the vehicle.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

in and out of your vehicle easier. If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- triggered in an accident, the steering column
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board will move upwards when the driver's door is
computer (Y page 226). opened. This occurs irrespective of the
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY
feature is activated in the on-board computer.
Mirrors 115
Mirrors X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
Rear-view mirror X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long

as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : the exterior mirror to the correct position.
forwards or back. You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
Exterior mirrors field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically
Adjusting the exterior mirrors if the rear window defroster is switched on
G WARNING and the outside temperature is low.
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects are actually closer than they
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
appear. You could misjudge the distance from
electrically
vehicles driving behind and cause an This function is only available in vehicles for
accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this Canada.
reason, make sure of the actual distance from
the vehicle driving behind by glancing over
your shoulder.

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
Z
116 Mirrors
i If you are driving faster than 9 mph hear a click and then the mirrors engage in
(15 km/h) you can no longer fold in the position (Y page 115).
exterior mirrors. The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
Setting the exterior mirrors (Y page 115).
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors G WARNING
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will If incident light from headlamps is prevented
otherwise not fold in when you select the Fold from striking the sensor in the rear-view
in mirrors when locking function in the on- mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high
board computer (Y page 227). in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in glare function will not operate.
position 1 in the ignition lock. Incident light could then blind you. This may
X Briefly press button :. distract you from the traffic conditions and,
as a result, you may cause an accident.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
automatically on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
This function is only available in vehicles for glare mode if the following conditions are met
Canada. simultaneously:
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function Rthe ignition is switched on and
is activated in the on-board computer Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
(Y page 227): sensor in the rear-view mirror.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
soon as you lock the vehicle from the reverse gear is engaged.
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the Parking position for the exterior
vehicle and then open the driver's or front- mirror on the front-passenger side
passenger door.
Setting and storing the parking position
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out. Using reverse gear
Exterior mirror out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors (only for Canada): press
and hold mirror-folding button : until you
Memory function 117
You can position the front-passenger side Calling up a stored parking position
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see setting
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
ignition lock.
position.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
passenger side using button ;.
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
X Engage reverse gear.
ignition lock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
the front-passenger side.

side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb. mirror on the driver's side
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
Memory function
passenger side returns to the driving Storing settings
position.
G WARNING
Using the memory button Only use the memory function on the driver's
You can position the front-passenger side side when the vehicle is stationary. You could
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see otherwise be distracted from the traffic
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you conditions by the seat moving of its own
engage reverse gear. This setting can be accord, and as a result cause an accident.
stored using memory button M ?.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in With the memory function, you can store up
position 2 in the ignition lock. to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
X With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use adjustment The following settings are stored as a single
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In memory preset:
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
curb should be visible. restraint
X Press memory button M ? and one of the Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
arrows on adjustment button = within Rdriver's side: position of the exterior

three seconds. mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
The parking position is stored if the exterior sides
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Z
118
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function
X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 113) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 115).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
119

Exterior lighting ................................ 120
Interior lighting ................................. 128
Replacing bulbs ................................. 129
Windshield wipers ............................ 132
Lights and windshield wipers

120 Exterior lighting
Useful information Asymmetrical low-beam headlamps

Have the headlamps converted back to
i This Operator's Manual describes all asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
models and all standard and optional qualified specialist workshop as soon as
equipment of your vehicle available at the possible after crossing the border again.
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Setting the exterior lighting
described. This also applies to safety- Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
i Read the information on qualified Rlight switch
Rcombination switch (Y page 124)

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 224)
Exterior lighting
Light switch
Operation
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(Y page 224).
1W Left-hand standing lamps

Driving abroad
2X Right-hand standing lamps
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low instrument cluster lighting
beam in countries in which traffic drives on 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
the opposite side of the road from the country controlled by the light sensor
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
glare to oncoming traffic. When using BR Rear fog lamp
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. fog lamps)
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
specialist workshop as close to the border as
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
possible before driving in these countries.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Exterior lighting 121
The exterior lighting (except the parking/ Ã is the favored light switch setting. The
standing lamps) switches off automatically if light setting is automatically selected
you: according to the brightness of the ambient
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
Ropen
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0. RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
Automatic headlamp mode automatically depending on the brightness
G WARNING of the ambient light.
If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, RWith the engine running: if you have
snowing or there is poor visibility, the low- activated the daytime running lamps
beam headlamps will not come on function via the on-board computer, the
automatically. This could endanger you and daytime running lamps or the low-beam

others. In such situations turn the light switch headlamps and parking lamps are switched
to L. on or off automatically depending on the
The automatic headlamp feature is only an brightness of the ambient light.
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's X To switch on automatic headlamp
lighting at all times. mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
Only for Canada:
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
1W Left-hand standing lamps When the engine is running, the vehicle is
2X Right-hand standing lamps stationary and in high ambient light
3T Parking lamps, license plate and brightness: if you turn the light switch
instrument cluster lighting to T, you turn on the daytime running
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, lamps and parking lamps.
controlled by the light sensor If the engine is running and you turn the light
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps switch to L, the manual settings take
BR Rear fog lamp
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front
fog lamps) The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
this, the daytime running lamps function must
be switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 224).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
Z
take precedence over the daytime running X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
lamps. turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
i In the USA, the daytime running lamps are
X Turn the light switch to L.
deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
The green L indicator lamp in the
Low-beam headlamps instrument cluster lights up.
G WARNING
Front fog lamps
If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy,
snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-
beam headlamps will not come on
automatically. This could endanger you and
others. In such situations turn the light switch
to L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an

aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.

3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
BR Rear fog lamp
1W Left-hand standing lamps CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front
2X Right-hand standing lamps fog lamps)
3T Parking lamps, license plate and In conditions where visibility is poor due to
instrument cluster lighting fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, visibility as well as making it easier for other
controlled by the light sensor road users to see you. They can be operated
together with the parking lamps or together
with the parking lamps and low-beam
BR Rear fog lamp headlamps.
CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn
fog lamps) the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
Even if the light sensor does not detect that 2 or start the engine.
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
headlamps switch on when the SmartKey is
inserted into the ignition lock and the light
switch is set to the L position. This is a
particularly useful function in the event of rain
and fog.
X Press the N button. X Press the R button.

The green N indicator lamp in the The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up. instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the front fog lamps: press X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
the N button. R button.
The green N indicator lamp in the The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. instrument cluster goes out.
Rear fog lamp Parking lamps

! If the battery has been excessively
discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park

your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.

instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
BR Rear fog lamp
CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front 1W Left-hand standing lamps
fog lamps) 2X Right-hand standing lamps
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of instrument cluster lighting
heavy fog. Please take note of the country- 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
specific regulations for the use of rear fog controlled by the light sensor
lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
BR Rear fog lamp
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine. CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front
fog lamps)
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X To switch on: turn light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Z
Standing lamps Combination switch

Turn signals


: High-beam headlamps
instrument cluster lighting ; Turn signal, right
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, = High-beam flasher
controlled by the light sensor ? Turn signal, left
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps X To indicate briefly: press the combination
BR Rear fog lamp switch briefly to the pressure point in the
CN Fog lamps (only vehicles with front direction of arrow ; or ?.
fog lamps) The corresponding turn signal flashes three
Switching on the parking lamps ensures the times.
corresponding side of the vehicle is X To indicate: press the combination switch
illuminated. beyond the pressure point in the direction
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
of arrow ; or ?.
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0. High-beam headlamps
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: Hazard warning lamps

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the Ã position, the high-beam
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the high-
beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:

X To switch off the high-beam
press button :.
headlamps: move the combination switch All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
back to its normal position. a turn signal using the combination switch,
The blue K indicator lamp in the only the turn signal lamp on the
instrument cluster goes out. corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, lamps: press button :.
it controls activation of the high-beam The hazard warning lamps automatically
headlamps (Y page 126). switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed.
High-beam flasher Rthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a
speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a halt.
If the vehicle returns to a speed of over
6 mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the
brakes, the hazard warning lamps are
deactivated automatically.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
: High-beam headlamps Headlamp cleaning system

; Turn signal, right The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
= High-beam flasher the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
? Turn signal, left operated five times (Y page 132) while the
lights are on and the engine is running. When
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the you switch off the ignition, the automatic
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the headlamp cleaning system is reset and
engine. counting is resumed from 0.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Z
Cornering light function while driving. This allows you to recognize

pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist

G WARNING
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
intended to support you while driving. The
driver is and remains responsible for proper
The cornering light function improves the vehicle lighting in accordance with the
illumination of the road over a wide angle in prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.
the direction you are turning, enabling better The system may be impaired or unavailable
visibility in tight bends, for example. It can when
only be activated when the low-beam
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,
headlamps are switched on.
or heavy spray
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is
25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn
signals or turn the steering wheel. dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for
example
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn The system cannot recognize the following
signals or turn the steering wheel to the road users:
straight-ahead position. RRoad users without a lighting system of
The cornering light function may remain lit for their own, e.g. pedestrians
a short time, but is automatically switched off RRoad users with dim lighting of their own,
after no more than three minutes. e.g. cyclists
RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. road users behind a guardrail
Active light function RIn some seldom cases, even road users with
a lighting system of their own may be
recognized too late or not at all.
The automatic high-beam headlamps will then
not be deactivated or it will be activated in
spite of preceding or oncoming road users.
This could endanger you and/or others and
cause an accident. Always pay close attention
to the traffic situation and switch off the high
beam manually if necessary.
The active light function is a system that

moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off

; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To activate: activate the Adaptive
You can use this function to set the
headlamps to change between low beam and Highbeam Assist function using the on-
high beam automatically. The system board computer (Y page 224).
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either X Turn the light switch to Ã.
approaching from the opposite direction or X Press the combination switch beyond the
traveling in front of your vehicle, and pressure point in the direction of
consequently switches the headlamps from arrow : .
high beam to low beam. The _ indicator lamp in the
The system automatically adapts the low- multifunction display lights up if it is dark
beam headlamp range depending on the and the light sensor activates the low-beam
distance to the other vehicle. Once the headlamps.
system no longer detects any other vehicles, If you drive at speeds above approximately
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. 28 mph (45 km/h):
The system's optical sensor is located behind the headlamp range is set automatically
the windshield near the overhead control depending on the distance between the
panel. vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected:
the high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you drive at speeds below approximately
30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users
are identified or if the roads are sufficiently
illuminated:
the high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
Z
128 Interior lighting
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ ? c To switch the front interior lighting
indicator lamp in the multifunction display on/off
remains lit. A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
X To deactivate: move the combination on/off
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out. Interior lighting control
General notes
Headlamps fogged up on the inside In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if discharging, the interior lighting functions are
there is high atmospheric humidity. automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
X Switch on the light and drive off. ignition lock.

The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and Automatic interior lighting control
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel

: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off (Coupe only)
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
Overhead control panel (example: Coupe) A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
: u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off
on/off (Coupe only) X To activate/deactivate: press the |
; | To switch the automatic interior button.
lighting control on/off When the automatic interior lighting
= p To switch the right-hand reading control is activated, the button is flush with
lamp on/off the overhead control panel.
Replacing bulbs 129
The interior lighting automatically switches Crash-responsive emergency lighting

on if you:
The interior lighting is activated automatically
Runlock the vehicle if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Ropen a door
X To switch off the crash-responsive
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
emergency lighting: press the hazard
The interior light is activated for a short while warning lamp button.
when the SmartKey is removed from the or
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
switch-off using the on-board computer
SmartKey.
(Y page 225).
Manual interior lighting control

Replacing bulbs

Xenon bulbs
G DANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could
get an electric shock and be seriously or even
fatally injured if you touch the electric
contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never
remove the cover from Xenon bulbs.
Front overhead control panel Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, but
have them replaced at a qualified workshop.
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off (Coupe only) If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
; | To switch the automatic interior you can recognize this by the following: the
lighting control on/off cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
= p To switch the right-hand reading from the top to the bottom and back again
lamp on/off when you start the engine. For this to be
? c To switch the front interior lighting observed, the lights must be switched on
on/off before starting the engine.
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
on/off vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
X To switch the front interior lighting on/
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
off: press the c button.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
Other bulbs
off (Coupe only): press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off: G WARNING
press the p button. Bulbs and lamps can become very hot. For
this reason, allow them to cool down before
changing them. Otherwise, you could burn
yourself when you touch them.
Z
130 Replacing bulbs
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.

Otherwise, they could, for example, damage
the bulbs and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurized and could
explode when you change them, especially if
they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.
Halogen headlamps
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 130). Have the bulbs that ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
you cannot replace yourself changed at a = Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W
qualified specialist workshop. ? Turn signal lamp: 3457A
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Replacing bulbs 131
Changing the front bulbs High-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon
Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)
headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the X Open the hood.
left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Open the hood.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
and pull it out.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out. it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
clockwise until it engages.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
Parking lamps/standing lamps
it clockwise. (halogen headlamps)
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.

X Open the hood.
and pull it out.
Z
132 Windshield wipers
X Pull out bulb holder ;. conditions, thereby causing an accident.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. in spring and fall.
X Insert bulb holder ;. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers
X Align housing cover : and turn it when the windshield is dry, as this could
clockwise until it engages. damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps) scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the car wash.
left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
specialist workshop to optical influences and the windshield
X Switch off the lights. becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
X Open the hood. the windshield wipers may be activated
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
pull it out.
windshield.
X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise, applying
For this reason, you should always switch
slight pressure, and remove it from bulb
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and
turn it clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
Combination switch
G WARNING
1 $ Windshield wipers off
The windshield will not longer be wiped
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
properly if the wiper blades are worn. This
could prevent you from observing the traffic set to low sensitivity)
Windshield wipers 133
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
set to high sensitivity) make sure that you touch only the wiper
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow arm of the wiper.
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
Replacing the wiper blades
B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the
windshield using washer fluid Removing the wiper blades
X Switch on the ignition. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
X Turn the combination switch to the lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
corresponding position. X Fold the wiper arm away from the
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate windshield until it engages.

wiping frequency is set automatically
according to the intensity of the rain. In

the Å position, the rain sensor is more
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield wipers to wipe more
frequently.
Replacing the wiper blades

X Firmly press release knob : and pull the
G WARNING
wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
For safety reasons, switch off the windshield
the direction of the arrow.
wipers and remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock before changing the wiper blades Installing the wiper blades
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer
the on-board electronics are in state 0).
on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched
the opposite direction to the arrow.
on suddenly and cause injury.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper X Make sure that wiper blade is seated
arm has been folded away from the correctly.

windshield. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without windshield.

a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release Problems with the windshield wipers
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper The windshield wipers are obstructed
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of X For safety reasons, you should remove the
the impact. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have or
the wiper blades changed at a qualified X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
specialist workshop. button and open the driver's door.
Z
134 Windshield wipers
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.

X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers are inoperative

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the
combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
135

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 136
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 140
Setting the air vents ......................... 146
Climate control
136 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period

during warm weather, e.g. using the
i This Operator's Manual describes all convenience opening feature (Y page 86).
models and all standard and optional This will speed up the cooling process and
equipment of your vehicle available at the the desired vehicle interior temperature
time of publication of the Operator's will be reached more quickly.
Manual. Country-specific differences are i The integrated filter can filter out most
possible. Please note that your vehicle may particles of dust, and completely filters out
not be equipped with all features pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
described. This also applies to safety- of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
related systems and functions. this reason, you should always observe the
i Read the information on qualified interval for replacing the filter, which is
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Since the replacement interval depends on
environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems pollution, the interval may be shorter than
stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
i It is possible that the residual heat
G WARNING function may be activated automatically an
Observe the settings recommended on the hour after the SmartKey is removed. The
following pages. The windows could vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to
otherwise fog up. This could prevent you from dry the air-conditioning system.
observing the traffic conditions, thereby
causing an accident.
G WARNING
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Climate control regulates the temperature

and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control is only operational when the
engine is running. The system only works
optimally when the side windows and the roof
are closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 145).
Overview of climate control systems 137
Control panel for dual-zone climate control
Canada only
: Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 143)
Climate control
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 143)
? Display
A Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 141)
B Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 140)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 144)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 140)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 142)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 142)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 143)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 142)
USA only
: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 141)
? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
A Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 144)
B Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 140)
Z
138 Overview of climate control systems
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 144)

D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 140)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 142)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 142)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 143)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 142)
I Display
Information about using dual-zone

climate control
The following contains notes and
recommendations on optimum use of
automatic climate control.
Climate control
RActivate climate control using the Ã and

¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly
until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors
or when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side as well. The
indicator lamp above the á button goes
out.
Overview of climate control systems 139
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 141)
? Display
A Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
B Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 145)
C Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 140)
D Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 144)
E Switches climate control on/off (Y page 140)
F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 142)
G Sets climate control to automatic (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE) (Y page 141)
H Sets the airflow (Y page 143)
I Sets the air distribution (Y page 142)
J Sets the temperature, left (Y page 142)
Rear control panel

K Increases the temperature (Y page 142)
L Display
M Reduces the temperature (Y page 142)
Z
140 Operating the climate control systems
Information about using 3-zone windows could fog up, impairing visibility and
automatic climate control endangering you and others.
The following contains instructions and i Switch on climate control primarily using
recommendations to enable you to get the the Ã button (Y page 141).
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
Activating/deactivating
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ignition lock.
ñ button to set a climate mode X To switch on: press the Ã button.
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The The indicator lamp above the Ã button

MEDIUM level is recommended. lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). to automatic mode.
ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly or
X Press the ^ button.
Climate control
until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, The indicator lamp above the ^ button
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors goes out. The previously selected settings
or when in a tunnel. The windows could are restored.
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn X To switch off: press the ^ button.
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp above the ^ button
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the lights up.
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment as well. The indicator lamp Activating/deactivating cooling with
above the á button goes out. air dehumidification
RUse the residual heat function if you want
Points to observe before use
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
when the ignition is switched off. The G WARNING
"residual heat" function can only be If you switch off the cooling function, the
activated or deactivated with the ignition vehicle will not be cooled when weather
switched off. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby
Operating the climate control causing an accident.
systems
Activating/deactivating climate The cooling with air dehumidification function
control is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
Points to observe before use dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
G WARNING Condensation may drip from the underside of
When the climate control system is the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
deactivated, the outside air supply and normal and not a sign that there is a
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose malfunction.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
Operating the climate control systems 141
i The cooling with air dehumidification X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
function uses refrigerant R134a. This ignition lock.
coolant does not contain X Set the desired temperature.
chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does X To activate: press the Ã button.
not damage the ozone layer. The indicator lamp above the Ã button
lights up. Automatic air distribution and
Activating/deactivating airflow are activated.
X To activate: press the ¿ button. i 3-zone automatic climate control: when
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button automatic mode is activated, you can
lights up. select a climate mode setting
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. (Y page 141).
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button X To deactivate: press the air distribution
goes out. The cooling with air button.
dehumidification function has a delayed Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
switch-off feature. button F(Y page 137).
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control: press
Problems with the cooling with air button I(Y page 139).
dehumidification function The indicator lamp above the Ã button
When you press the ¿ button, the goes out.
indicator lamp in the button flashes three or
times or remains off. You can no longer switch X Press the airflow button.
on the cooling with air dehumidification Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
function. button G(Y page 137).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 3-zone automatic climate control: press
button H(Y page 139).
The indicator lamp above the Ã button
Setting climate control to automatic goes out.
G WARNING
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
Adjusting the climate mode settings
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up You can select the following climate mode
more quickly. Window fogging may impair settings in automatic mode:
visibility and endanger you and others. FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
In automatic mode, the set temperature is cooler
maintained automatically at a constant level. MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
The system automatically regulates the DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow warmer and with less draft
and the air distribution. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
Automatic mode will achieve optimal ignition lock.
operation if cooling with air dehumidification X Press the Ã button.
is also activated. If desired, cooling with air
X Press button G up or down and select the
dehumidification can be deactivated.
desired level (Y page 139)
Z
Setting the temperature Only change the temperature setting in

small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 † ).
Climate control X To increase/reduce the temperature in
Different temperatures can be set for the the rear compartment using the rear
driver's and front-passenger sides. control panel: press button K or
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the M(Y page 139).
ignition lock. Only change the temperature setting in
X To increase/reduce: press switch E or small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 † ).
H up or down (Y page 137).
Only change the temperature setting in
Setting the air distribution
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 † ).
Air distribution settings
3-zone automatic climate control P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
Climate control
O Directs the airflow through the

footwell air vents
S Directs the airflow through the center,
side and footwell air vents (Cabriolet
only)
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs airflow through the defroster,
center and side air vents (Cabriolet or
Coupe only: only for certain countries)
Automatic climate control zones a Directs air through the defroster and
You can select different temperature settings footwell vents
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
well as for the rear compartment. airflow is always directed through the side
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the air vents. The side air vents can only be
ignition lock. closed when the controls on the side air
X To increase/reduce the temperature in vents are turned downwards.
the front compartment: press switch F
or J up or down (Y page 139). Climate control
Only change the temperature setting in X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 † ). ignition lock.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in X Press switch F up or down repeatedly until
the rear compartment using the front the desired symbol appears in the display
control panel: press the á button. (Y page 137).
The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
X Press switch F or J up or down
(Y page 139).
3-zone automatic climate control adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment.
ignition lock.
X Press switch I up or down repeatedly until
Defrosting the windshield
the desired symbol appears in the display
(Y page 139). You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
Setting the airflow Switch off the "defrosting" function as soon
as the windshield is clear again.
Climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ button.
X To increase/reduce: press switch G up The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
or down (Y page 137). lights up.
Climate control
The climate control system switches to the
3-zone automatic climate control following functions:
Rheating with dehumidification on
ignition lock. Rhigh airflow (depending on the outside
X To increase/reduce: press switch H up temperature)
Rhigh temperature (depending on the
or down (Y page 139).
outside temperature)
Rair distribution to the windshield and
Switching the ZONE function on/off front side windows

Rair-recirculation mode off
X To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
lights up. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the goes out. The previously selected settings
temperature setting for the driver's side is are restored. The heating with air
not adopted for the front-passenger side. dehumidification function remains on. Air-
3-zone automatic climate control: the recirculation mode remains deactivated.
temperature setting for the driver's side is or
not adopted for the front-passenger side X Press the Ã button.
and the rear compartment. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
X To deactivate: press the á button. goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set
The indicator lamp above the á button to automatic mode.
goes out. or
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the X Automatic climate control: press
temperature setting for the driver's side is temperature button E or H up or down
adopted for the front-passenger side. (Y page 137).
3-zone automatic climate control: the Automatic climate control: press
temperature setting for the driver's side is temperature button F or J up or down
(Y page 139).
Z
or P or O symbol appears in the

X Automatic climate control: press switch display.
G up or down (Y page 137). i You should only select this setting until
Automatic climate control: press button the windshield is clear again.
H up or down (Y page 139).
Rear window defroster

MAX COOL maximum cooling Activating/deactivating
The MAX COOL function is only available in
G WARNING
vehicles for the USA.
Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting
MAX COOL is only operational when the off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could
engine is running. endanger you and others.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The rear window defroster has a high current
Climate control
X To activate: press off-road button Ù draw. You should therefore switch it off as
again. soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously the rear window defroster switches off
selected settings are restored. automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
When you activate MAX COOL, climate
window defroster may switch off.
control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling ignition lock.
Rmaximum airflow X Press the ¤ button.
Rair-recirculation mode on
The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
lights up or goes out.
Defrosting the windows
Problems with the rear window
Windows fogged up on the inside defroster
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air The rear window defroster has deactivated
dehumidification function. prematurely or cannot be activated.
X Activate automatic mode Ã. X Switch off any consumers that are not
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
the defrosting function (Y page 143). lighting.
i You should only select this setting until When the battery is sufficiently charged,
the rear window defroster is activated
the windshield is clear again.
again automatically.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X Automatic climate control: press switch Activating/deactivating air-
F up or down (Y page 137) until the recirculation mode
P or O symbol appears in the
display. G WARNING
X Automatic climate control: press button
At low outside temperatures, only switch over
to air-recirculation mode for brief periods.
I up or down (Y page 139) until the
Otherwise, the windows could fog up, thus Activating/deactivating the residual
impairing visibility and endangering yourself heat function
and others. This may prevent you from
The residual heat function is only available in
observing the traffic conditions and thereby
vehicles for Canada with automatic climate
cause an accident.
control.
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if It is possible to make use of the residual heat
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle of the engine to continue heating the
from outside. The air already inside the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after
vehicle will then be recirculated. the engine has been switched off. The heating
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the time depends on the temperature that has
same for all control panels. been set.
Coupe: the residual heat function only works
optimally if the side windows and panorama
ignition lock.
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
X To activate: press the g button.
Cabriolet: the residual heat function only
Climate control
The indicator lamp above the g button
works optimally if the soft top is closed.
lights up.
X To activate: press the Ì button.
i In the event of high pollution levels1 or at
The indicator lamp above the Ì button
high outside temperatures, air-
lights up.
recirculation mode is automatically
activated. When air-recirculation mode is i The blower will run at a low speed
activated automatically, the indicator lamp regardless of the airflow setting.
above the g button does not light up. i If you activate the residual heat function
Outside air is added after about at high temperatures, only the ventilation
30 minutes. will be activated. The blower runs at
XTo deactivate: press the g button. medium speed.
The indicator lamp above the g button X To deactivate: press the Ì button.
goes out. The indicator lamp above the Ì button
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates goes out.
automatically:
i It is possible that the residual heat
Rafter approximately five minutes at function may be activated automatically an
outside temperatures below hour after the SmartKey is removed. The
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to
Rafter approximately five minutes if dry the air-conditioning system.
cooling with air dehumidification is Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
outside temperatures above
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rif the battery voltage drops
1 Automatic climate control only.
Z
146 Setting the air vents
Setting the air vents Setting the side air vents

G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air
vents. If necessary, direct the airflow away to
a different area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior, X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
please observe the following notes: down.
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
i Side window defroster vent : is only
Climate control
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,

snow or leaves. open when side air vent ; is open.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the
Setting the center air vents vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
: Center air vent, left

; Center air vent, right
= Center vent thumbwheel, right
? Center vent thumbwheel, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = : Air vent thumbwheel
and ? up or down. ; Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
Setting the air vents 147
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :

clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
You can adjust the blower output of

AIRSCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF
button (Y page 112).
Climate control
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel, only with automatic
climate control2
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
AIRSCARF, setting the vents

G WARNING
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
could cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
2 Only for Canada.
Z
148
149

Breaking-in notes .............................. 150
Driving ............................................... 150
Automatic transmission ................... 158
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 165
Parking ............................................... 167
Driving tips ........................................ 169
Driving systems ................................ 174
150 Driving
Useful information i You should also observe these notes on

running in if the engine or parts of the drive
i This Operator's Manual describes all train on your vehicle have been replaced.
models and all standard and optional i Always observe the respective speed
equipment of your vehicle available at the limits.
Driving and parking

possible. Please note that your vehicle may Driving
described. This also applies to safety- Important safety notes
G WARNING
i Read the information on qualified Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Breaking-in notes
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Important safety notes stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
New and replaced brake pads and discs only securely and as specified in order to ensure
reach their optimum braking effect after sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
several hundred kilometers of driving. loose floormats.
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal. G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)
Rshoes with thick soles
The more you look after the engine when it is
Rshoes with high heels
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future. Rslippers
RYou should therefore drive at varying There is a risk of an accident.

vehicle and engine speeds for the first Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
1,000 miles (1,500 km). usage of the pedals.
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this period. G WARNING
RChange gear in good time, before the If you switch off the ignition while driving,
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
red area of the tachometer.
for example, the power steering and the brake
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
boosting effect. You will require considerably
pedal past the point of resistance more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
(kickdown). of an accident.
ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can
increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed.
Driving 151
G WARNING KEYLESS-GO
If the parking brake has not been fully
General notes
released when driving, the parking brake can:
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together
Roverheat and cause a fire with:
Driving and parking

Rlose its hold function. - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release or another key
the parking brake fully before driving off. - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metal
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
objects, e.g. metal cases.
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature. This can affect the functionality of
KEYLESS-GO.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
is stationary. a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO start function and a detachable Start/
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
Stop button.
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the The Start/Stop button must be inserted into
drive train. the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
the vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
SmartKey positions in succession corresponds to the different
SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This
SmartKey is only the case if you are not depressing the
brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. You should, however,
g To remove the SmartKey always take the SmartKey with you when
(shift the transmission to position P) leaving the vehicle. As long as the
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the
as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) Start/Stop button and
Relectrically powered equipment can be
and drive position
3 To start the engine operated.
i The SmartKey can be turned in the

ignition lock even if it is not the correct
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Z
152 Driving
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

Driving and parking
Start/Stop button
= USA only
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light ? Canada only
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
see (Y page 258). Starting the engine
X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition Important safety notes
lock ;.
G WARNING
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
approximately 2 seconds' recognition time.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
You can then use Start/Stop button :.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
Activating power supply the engine running in enclosed spaces
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not without sufficient ventilation.
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
when starting the engine.
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
The power supply is switched on. You can General notes
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example. i The catalytic converter is preheated for
i If you then open the driver's door when in up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The
this position, the power supply is sound of the engine may change during this
deactivated. time.
Switching on the ignition
Automatic transmission
XPosition 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
X Shift the transmission to position P.
button : twice.
The transmission position display in the
The ignition is switched on.
multifunction display shows P.
i The ignition is switched off when:
Rthedriver's door is opened and i You can also start the engine when the
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
transmission is in position N.
when in this position.
Driving 153
Starting procedure with the SmartKey When engaging transmission position D or R,

i To start the engine using the SmartKey always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ not simultaneously accelerate.
Stop button out of the ignition lock.
! If a warning tone sounds and the
Driving and parking

X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to Release Park. Brake message appears
position 3 (Y page 151) and release it as in the multifunction display, the parking
soon as the engine is running. brake is still applied. Release the parking
brake.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
G WARNING
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
X Release the parking brake (Y page 168).
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as they X Release the brake pedal.
could otherwise accidentally start the engine. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, from position P to the desired position if
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could the selector lever lock released.
result in an accident and/or serious personal i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
injury. pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
You can open the doors from the inside at
start the vehicle without inserting the any time.
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
Stop button must be inserted into the You can also deactivate the automatic
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in locking feature (Y page 225).
the vehicle. i Upshifts take place at higher engine
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it speeds after a cold start. This helps the
depressed. catalytic converter to reach its operating
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 151)
temperature more quickly.
once.
The engine starts. Hill start assist
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
Pulling away longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
Automatic transmission away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
G WARNING brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
If the engine speed is above the idling speed leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
and you engage transmission position D or assist.
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident. Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
Z
154 Driving
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you malfunction has caused the system to be
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
This gives you enough time to move your foot displayed.
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to Automatic engine switch-off
Driving and parking
roll.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal. Method of operation
The vehicle is then held for about a second. The ECO start/stop function is operational
X Pull away. and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
the multifunction display, if:
Hill start assist will not function if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on green.
a downhill gradient. Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe outside temperature is within the
Rthe parking brake is applied.
comfort range.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
ECO start/stop function has been reached.
Important safety notes Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
G WARNING not fogged up when the air-conditioning
If the engine is switched off automatically and system is switched on.
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted Rthe hood is closed.
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
There is a risk of accident and injury.
seat belt is fastened.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
rolling away. have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
be shown in yellow.
General notes i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped
When the green ¤ symbol is shown in the automatically.
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
function switches the engine off i The engine can be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops moving. automatically a maximum of four times
The engine starts automatically when the (first stop and three subsequent stops) in
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in
start/stop function thereby helps you to yellow in the multifunction display after the
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions engine has been started automatically for
of your vehicle. the fourth time. The automatic engine
switch-off is available once again when the
Every time you switch on the engine using the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
start/stop function is activated. multifunction display.
If the ECO start/stop function has been i During automatic engine switch-off, the
manually deactivated (Y page 155) or a climate control system only operates at a
Driving 155
reduced capacity. If you require full climate Vehicles with automatic transmission
control capacity, the ECO start/stop The engine is started automatically if you:
function can be deactivated by pressing the Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
ECO button (Y page 155).
activated and the transmission is in
Vehicles with automatic transmission position D or N
Driving and parking

The ECO start/stop function switches the Rdepress the accelerator pedal
engine off automatically if you: Rmove the transmission out of position P.
Rbrake the vehicle to a standstill in i Shifting the transmission to position P
transmission position D or N and does not start the engine.
Ryou depress the brake pedal.
i You can still activate the HOLD function Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
when the vehicle is stationary, even if the stop function
engine has been switched off
automatically. It is then not necessary to
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the
accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine
must be started first.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available ECO button
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
X To switch off: press button :.
green in the multifunction display.
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
Automatic engine start ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
out.
General notes X To switch on: press button :.
The engine starts automatically if: Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function for automatic engine switch-off
by pressing the ECO button. (Y page 154) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
Ryou engage reverse gear R. is shown in green in the multifunction
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
display.
Rthe brake system requires this.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 154) are fulfilled, the
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
deviates from the set range. multifunction display. If this is the case, the
Rthe system detects moisture on the ECO start/stop function is not available.
windshield when the air-conditioning
system is switched on. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
Rthe charge level of the battery is too low. stop function has been deactivated
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the manually or as the result of a malfunction.
driver's door. The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
Z
156 Driving
i Every time you switch on the engine using

the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the
ECO start/stop function is activated.
Driving and parking
Driving 157
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor
Driving and parking

RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 152). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 313).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 296). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Z
158 Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission Transmission position and drive

program display
! If the transmission position display in the
G WARNING multifunction display is not working, you
If the engine speed is above the idling speed should pull away carefully to check whether
Driving and parking
and you engage transmission position D or the desired transmission position is

R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There engaged. Select transmission position D.
is a risk of an accident. Do not restrict the shift range.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a : Transmission position display
risk of an accident. ; Drive program display
After switching off the engine, always switch The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
to parking position P. Prevent the parked inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
vehicle from rolling away by applying the go out when the SmartKey is removed from
parking brake. the ignition lock.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
Selector lever
j Park position with selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Automatic transmission 159
Transmission positions A Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to N
B Park position
while driving. The transmission
Do not shift the transmission into could otherwise be damaged.
position P (Y page 167) unless the
No power is transmitted from the
Driving and parking

vehicle is stationary. The parking
engine to the drive wheels.
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. In addition to Releasing the brakes will allow you
engaging the parking lock, you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
must always apply the parking push it or tow it.
brake to secure the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
The SmartKey can only be removed only shift the transmission to
if the transmission is in position P. position N if the vehicle is in danger
If the SmartKey is removed from of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
the ignition lock, the selector lever ! Rolling in neutral N can damage
is locked. the drive train.
If the vehicle electronics are
malfunctioning, the selector lever 7 Drive
may be locked in position P. To The automatic transmission
release a locked selector lever, see changes gear automatically. All
"Manual override of parking lock" forward gears are available.
(Y page 164).
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified Changing gear
specialist workshop. The automatic transmission shifts to the
C Reverse gear individual gears automatically when it is in
Only shift the transmission to R transmission position D. This automatic
when the vehicle is stationary. gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Ra shift range restriction, if selected
Rthe selected drive program
E/S or M (vehicles with dynamic handling
package) (Y page 160)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Z
Driving tips The program selector button allows you to

choose between different driving
Kickdown characteristics.
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. E Economy Comfortable, economical
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the driving
Driving and parking
pressure point.
S Sport Sporty driving style
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed. M Manual Manual gear shifting
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached. i For further information on the automatic
The automatic transmission shifts back up. drive program, see (Y page 161).
Only change from automatic drive program
E or S to manual drive program M when the
Program selector button vehicle is stationary.
General notes i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Program selector button
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
In the automatic drive program, you can
restrict or expand the shift range by using the
steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 161).
In the manual drive program, you can change
Program selector button on vehicles with the gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
dynamic handling package or the selector lever (Y page 162).
X Press program selector button : i You can only change gear with the
repeatedly until the letter for the desired steering wheel paddle shifters when the
gearshift program appears in the transmission is in position D.
multifunction display.
Automatic drive program Shift range:

Drive program E is characterized by the = You can use the engine's braking
following: effect.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
5 To use the braking effect of the
forward and reverse gears, unless the
Driving and parking

engine on downhill gradients and
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
for driving:
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
Ron steep mountain roads
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example Rin mountainous terrain
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Rin arduous conditions
sooner. This results in the vehicle being 4 To use the braking effect of the
driven at lower engine speeds and the
engine on extremely steep downhill
wheels being less likely to spin
gradients and on long downhill
Drive program S is characterized by the stretches
following:
Rsporty engine settings Restricting the shift range
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
X Press the selector lever to the left towards
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
D–.
later
or
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
as a result of the later automatic
shifter.
transmission shift points
The automatic transmission shifts down
one gear and restricts the shift range to the
relevant gear.
Shift ranges
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
Introduction
engine speed when shifting down, the
When the automatic transmission is in automatic transmission protects against
position D, it is possible to restrict or expand engine damage by not shifting down.
the shift range (Y page 161).
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
The shift range selected is shown in the range is reached and you continue to
multifunction display. The automatic accelerate, the automatic transmission
transmission shifts only as far as the selected shifts up, even if the shift range is
gear. restricted. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Derestricting the shift range

X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
towards D+.
or
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The shift range is derestricted.
Z
Clearing the shift range restriction Upshifting

X Press and hold the selector lever towards X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
D+ until D is shown once more in the towards D+.
multifunction display. or
or X
Driving and parking
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel shifter.
paddle shifter until D is shown again in the The automatic transmission shifts up to the
multifunction display. next gear.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D. i Vehicles with the dynamic handling
package: if the maximum engine speed for
the shift range is reached and you continue
Selecting the ideal shift range to accelerate, the automatic transmission
X Press the selector lever to the left towards shifts up, except when manual drive
D– and hold it in position. program M is selected.
or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle Downshifting
shifter and hold it in position. X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
The automatic transmission shifts to the towards D–.
gear which allows optimum acceleration or
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
transmission shifts down one or more
shifter.
gears.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Manual drive program i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
shifting down, the automatic transmission
Switching on the manual drive program will shift down to a gear that will allow the
X Press the program selector button vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
(Y page 160) repeatedly until M appears in i To avoid overrevving the engine when
the multifunction display. downshifting, the automatic transmission
The manual drive program is only available for does not shift to a lower gear if this would
vehicles with the dynamic handling package. result in the maximum engine speed being
Manual drive program M is different from exceeded.
drive program S with regard to spontaneity,
responsiveness and smoothness of gear Kickdown
changes. You can also use kickdown for maximum
Manual drive program M can be selected acceleration in manual drive program M.
using the program selector button. If the
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
transmission is in position D, you can change
pressure point.
gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
or the selector lever in manual drive program
depending on the engine speed.
M. The gear selected is shown in the
i During kickdown, you cannot change gear

using the steering wheel paddle shifters or
the selector lever.
Switching off the manual drive program
Driving and parking

X Vehicles with the dynamic handling
package: press the program selector
button (Y page 160) repeatedly until E or
S appears in the multifunction display.
Z
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking
workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Releasing the parking lock manually cloth) from the right-hand edge. Pull
selector lever gaiter : up and out.
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to
X Press release button ; down and
remove the selector lever gaiter from the
center console. This could damage the simultaneously move the selector lever out
selector lever gaiter. of position P.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is
possible to release the selector lever lock
manually to move it out of position P. This
occurs if the vehicle is towed away, for
example.
Transfer case
! Performance tests may only be carried
X Apply the parking brake. out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
X Pry off selector lever gaiter : with a flat, system or transfer case could otherwise be
blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for a performance test.
! If the parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer, the ignition must be
switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop
button in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will
Refueling 165
otherwise automatically intervene. The ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
brake system could otherwise be damaged. gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel
system and engine.
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you
Driving and parking

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.
transmitted to both axles. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and
have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
Refueling ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
G WARNING surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. paintwork.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
system could be blocked by particles from
materials near gasoline.
the fuel can.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Further information on fuel and on fuel grades
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
can be found in the "Fuel" section
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
(Y page 362).
contact.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your Refueling
health.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
G WARNING
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline
to spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
G WARNING
E85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours are
poisonous, highly flammable and highly
combustible. E85 fuel can cause serious : To open the fuel filler flap
injury if ignited, if you come into contact with ; To insert the fuel filler cap
it you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoid = Tire pressure table
inhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skin
? Fuel type to be used
contact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any open
flames before refueling. Keep sparks away The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
from E85 fuel, and do not smoke. automatically when you open or close the
Z
166 Refueling
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- lamp may light up. A message appears in
GO. the multifunction display (Y page 241).
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed For further information on warning and
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
next to the filling pump indicates the side of see (Y page 262).
Driving and parking
the vehicle.
Opening
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0:
"SmartKey removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Closing
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.
i The 8 reserve fuel light flashes if you
are driving with the fuel filler cap open. In
addition, the ; Check Engine warning
Parking 167
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
Driving and parking

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 151).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 73).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
Parking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass G WARNING
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to If you leave children unsupervised in the
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
could ignite. There is a risk of fire. example:
Park the vehicle so that no flammable Rreleasing the parking brake
materials come into contact with parts of the Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not the parking position P
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain Rstarting the engine.
fields.
They could also operate the vehicle's
G WARNING equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available When leaving the vehicle, always take the
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
for example, the power steering and the brake leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to
the vehicle or damage to the drive train.
Z
168 Parking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against Only use the parking brake to brake the
rolling away unintentionally: vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
Rthe parking brake must be applied. not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
Rthe transmission must be in position P and wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the SmartKey must be removed from the the wheels begin turning again.
Driving and parking
ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
G WARNING
wheels must be turned towards the curb. If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Switching off the engine Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
Vehicles with automatic transmission
the parking position P
X Apply the parking brake firmly. Rstarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position P. They could also operate the vehicle's
Using the SmartKey equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ignition lock and remove it.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The immobilizer is activated.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
i The SmartKey can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P.
Using KEYLESS-GO
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 151).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i When the driver's door is closed, this
corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When
the driver's door is open, it corresponds to
SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKey
removed".
If you try to switch off the engine when the If you brake the vehicle with the parking
transmission is not in position P, a message brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
appears in the multifunction display. A signal X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
sounds. When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Parking brake
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
G WARNING keep it depressed.
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking X Pull release handle :.
brake, the braking distance is considerably When the ignition is switched on or the
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
increased danger of skidding and accidents. J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster.
Driving tips 169
Parking the vehicle for a long period Drive sensibly – save fuel
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than Observe the following tips to save fuel:
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by X The tires should always be inflated to the
exhaustive discharging. recommended tire pressure.
Driving and parking

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than X Remove unnecessary loads.
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as X Remove roof racks when they are not
a result of lack of use. needed.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
seek advice. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
i You can obtain information about trickle X Have all maintenance work carried out as
chargers from a qualified specialist indicated by the service intervals in the
workshop. Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
Driving tips Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic
General notes and in mountainous terrain.
Drinking and driving
G WARNING
G WARNING
Always remember that you must concentrate
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's
driving are very dangerous combinations.
concentration must always be directed
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
primarily at road traffic. For your own safety
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
and that of others, we recommend that you
judgment.
stop the vehicle at a safe place and in
accordance with the traffic conditions before The possibility of a serious or even fatal
making or accepting a phone call. accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Comply with all legal requirements if you use
the telephone while driving. Use the hands- Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
free system and only use the telephone when anyone to drive who has been drinking or
road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In taking drugs.
some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers
to use mobile phones while driving. Pedals
Only operate the audio system or COMAND
G WARNING
(Cockpit Management and Data System) in
compliance with all legal requirements and Make sure absolutely no objects are
when the road, weather and traffic conditions obstructing the pedals' range of movement.
permit. You may otherwise not be able to Keep the driver's footwell clear of all
observe the traffic conditions, endangering obstacles. If there are any floormats or
yourself and others. carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
Remember that your vehicle covers a distance
of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second when During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
it is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately the objects could get caught between the
50 km/h). pedals. You could then no longer brake or
Z
170 Driving tips
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and ECO display

injury.
Rolling with the engine switched off

Driving and parking
G WARNING
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the brake when the engine is not running.
Steering and braking requires significantly Example: ECO display
more effort and you could lose control of the The ECO display gives you information on how
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. economical your driving style is. The ECO
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is display assists you in achieving the optimum
in motion. driving style in terms of consumption, taking
the actual and selected conditions into
Exhaust check consideration. Your driving style can
significantly influence the vehicle's
G WARNING consumption.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your The ECO display consists of three bars:
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
RAcceleration
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
RConstant
unconsciousness and possible death.
RCoasting
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. The percent value is the average value of the
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are three bars. The three bars and the mean value
entering the vehicle while driving, have the begin at the value of 50%. A higher
cause determined and corrected percentage indicates a more economical
immediately. If you must drive under these driving style.
conditions, drive only with at least one The ECO display does not provide any
window fully open at all times. information on the actual consumption. A
fixed percentage count in the ECO display
Certain engine systems are designed to keep does not indicate a fixed consumption figure
the level of poisonous components in exhaust in l/100 km.
fumes within legal limits.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
These systems only work at peak efficiency if dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
RLoad
the manufacturer's specifications. Only have
work on the engine carried out by qualified RTire pressure
and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians. RCold start
The engine settings must not be changed RChoice of route
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all RElectrical consumers switched on
specific service work must be carried out at These factors are not taken into
regular intervals and in accordance with the consideration by the ECO display.
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
Driving tips 171
Acceleration (evaluation of all dynamically at the beginning of the journey.

acceleration) On longer journeys, there are fewer
changes. For more dynamic changes, carry
The bar fills up: The bar empties: out a manual reset.
Moderate Sporty acceleration Further information on the ECO display
Driving and parking

acceleration, (Y page 217).
especially at high
speeds
Braking
Constant (evaluation of driving style at Important safety notes
any time)
G WARNING
The bar fills up: The bar empties:
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Constant speed and Speed variations an attempt to increase the engine's braking
avoidance of effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
unnecessary There is an increased danger of skidding and
acceleration and accidents.
deceleration Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Coasting (evaluation of total
deceleration) Downhill gradients
The bar fills up: The bar empties: ! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
Drive with care and Frequent braking early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
remove your foot advantage of the engine braking effect and
from the accelerator helps avoid overheating and excessive
pedal in good time: wear of the brakes.
the vehicle can
When you take advantage of the engine
coast without
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
braking
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the
i An economical driving style specially drive train. This type of damage is not
requires driving at moderate engine covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories Heavy and light loads
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
Rdrive in drive program E. driving, the braking system can overheat. This
i On longer journeys, e.g. on highways, the increases the stopping distance and can even
only the bar in the "Constant" category cause the braking system to fail. There is a
changes. risk of an accident.
i The ECO display calculates the driving Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
style from the start of the journey to the depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
end. For this reason, the bars change pedal at the same time.
Z
172 Driving tips
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly an extent that safe braking is substantially
results in excessive and premature wear to impaired. This could result in an accident.
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy G WARNING
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but Make sure that you do not endanger other
Driving and parking
drive on for a short while. This allows the road users when you apply the brakes.
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
Wet roads the instrument cluster and you hear a
warning tone while the engine is running,
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain the brake fluid level may be too low.
without braking, there may be a delayed Observe additional warning messages in
reaction from the brakes when braking for the the multifunction display.
first time. This may also occur after the The brake fluid level may be too low due to
vehicle has been washed or driven through brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
deep water.
Have the brake system checked
You have to depress the brake pedal more immediately. This work should be carried
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the out at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying performance tests may only be carried out
attention to the traffic conditions. This will on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them planning to have the vehicle tested on such
more quickly and protecting them against a dynamometer, contact an authorized
corrosion. Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
information first. Otherwise, you could
Limited braking performance on salt- damage the drive train or the brake system.
treated roads ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt system operates automatically, the engine
residue may form on the brake discs and and the ignition must be switched off
brake pads. This can result in a significantly (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
longer braking distance. lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
1) while the parking brake is being tested
on a brake dynamometer.
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so. Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
beginning and end of a journey. system.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes

G WARNING
If brake pads or brake fluid other than those
recommended are used, the braking
properties of the vehicle can be degraded to
Driving tips 173
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
system operates automatically, the engine in conditions in which hydroplaning may
and the ignition system must be switched occur, you must drive in the following
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the manner:
ignition lock or Start/Stop button in Rlower your speed.
Driving and parking

position 0 or 1) when: Ravoidruts.
Rtesting the parking brake on a brake Rbrake carefully.
dynamometer.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with Driving on flooded roads
the front axle raised.
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
Check the depth of any water before driving
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
through it. Drive slowly through standing
system.
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
All checks and maintenance work on the vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
brake system must be carried out at a This can damage the electronic
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a components in the engine or the automatic
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. transmission. Water can also be drawn in
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. can cause engine damage.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular Winter driving
intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake Important safety notes
pedal when driving at a high speed. This
improves the grip of the brake pads. G WARNING
You can find a description of Brake Assist If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
(BAS) on (Y page 64) or of BAS PLUS on an attempt to increase the engine's braking
(Y page 65). effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Driving on wet roads Do not shift down for additional engine
Hydroplaning braking on a slippery road surface.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth G DANGER

on the road surface, there is a danger of If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
hydroplaning occurring, even if: ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Ryou drive at low speeds. such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
Z
174 Driving systems
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not Driving systems

facing into the wind.
Cruise control
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Driving with summer tires The cruise control is a convenience system
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" designed to assist the driver during vehicle
section (Y page 324). operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle's speed
Slippery road surfaces and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
G WARNING and weather conditions make it advisable to
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in travel at a constant speed.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking RThe use of the cruise control can be
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
There is an increased danger of skidding and traffic because conditions do not allow safe
accidents. driving at a constant speed.
Do not shift down for additional engine RThe use of the cruise control can be
braking on a slippery road surface. dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
G WARNING spin and loss of control.
The outside temperature indicator is not RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
designed to serve as an ice-warning device in fog.
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. The "Resume" function should only be
Indicated temperatures just above the operated if the driver is fully aware of the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road previously set speed and wishes to resume
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, this particular preset speed.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
G WARNING
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
The cruise control brakes automatically so
stopped when moving at low speed:
that the set speed is not exceeded.
X Shift the transmission to position N.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road General notes
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
Cruise control maintains a constant road
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
i For more information on driving with steep downhill gradients, especially if the
snow chains, see (Y page 325). vehicle is laden, you must select shift range
1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine,
which relieves the load on the brake system
and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Driving systems 175
Use cruise control only if road and traffic Storing and maintaining the current
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a speed
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Driving and parking

Cruise control lever
You can adopt the current speed if you are

driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
: To activate or increase speed
up : or down ;.
; To activate or reduce speed
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
= To deactivate cruise control
pedal.
? To activate at the current speed/last Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
stored speed automatically maintains the stored speed.
When you activate cruise control, the stored
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
speed is shown in the multifunction display
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
the segments between the stored speed and
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
the maximum speed light up.
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following Storing the current speed or calling up
activation conditions must be fulfilled: the last stored speed
Rthe parking brake must be released. G WARNING
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph The set speed stored in memory should only
(30 km/h). be set again if prevailing road conditions and
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. legal speed limits permit. Possible
Rthe transmission must be in position D. acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
Z
176 Driving systems
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
Driving and parking
down ; to the point of resistance.

Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards increments (10 km/h increments):
you :. briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the point of resistance.
pedal. Every time the cruise control lever is
The first time cruise control is activated, it pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stores the current speed or regulates the stored is increased or reduced.
speed of the vehicle to the previously i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
stored speed.
depress the accelerator pedal. For
example, if you accelerate briefly to
Setting a speed overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
G WARNING
after you have finished overtaking.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
Deactivating cruise control
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise

control:
forwards :.
or
X Brake.
Driving systems 177
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: G WARNING

Ryou depress the parking brake. DISTRONIC PLUS distance is not a substitute
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph for the active intervention of the driver. It does
(30 km/h). not detect pedestrians or stationary objects,
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. nor can it detect, recognize or predict the
Driving and parking

road's course or the movements of vehicles
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
in front. DISTRONIC PLUS can only brake the
while driving. vehicle using 40% of the vehicle's maximum
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear available brake force.
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
Control Off message in the multifunction vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
display for approximately five seconds. vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane
i When you switch off the engine, the last next to your vehicle, especially if the vehicles
speed stored is cleared. are not driving on the middle of their lane.
The driver must always pay careful attention
to the road, weather and traffic conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS The driver must drive, steer and brake in a
manner which will allow him to always have
Important safety notes control of the vehicle.
G WARNING Sources of high-frequency radio waves, such
The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with as toll stations, speed-measuring radar, etc.,
its operational characteristics. We strongly can cause DISTRONIC PLUS to fail
recommend that you review the following temporarily.
information carefully before operating the
system. G WARNING
The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and
G WARNING traffic conditions into account. Only use the
The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and
system. Its speed adjustment reduction traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
capability is intended to make cruise control at a constant speed.
more effective and usable when traffic speeds
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does G WARNING
it, replace the need for extreme care. Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
The responsibility for the vehicle's speed, dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most in tire traction can result in wheel spin and
importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe loss of control.
stopping distance, always remains with the The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in
driver. adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not
The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of
traffic conditions into account. fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This
could result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Z
178 Driving systems
G WARNING Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:

The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather Rwhen changing to the right lane, if the
conditions into account. Switch off the vehicles in the left lane are driving slower
DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if: Rwhen driving into a filter lane or an
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or expressway exit
Driving and parking
ice. The wheels could lose traction while Rin complex driving situations, for example
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle in construction sites on an expressway
could skid. In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS will
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers maintain the set speed if it is not deactivated.
are dirty or visibility is diminished due to DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only for
snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance maintaining a set speed and a set distance
control system functionality could be from the objects moving in front of the
impaired. vehicle.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is G WARNING
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able An intermittent warning sounds and the
to recognize dangerous situations until it is distance warning lamp · in the instrument
too late. This could cause an accident in which cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS
you and/or others could be injured. system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current
G WARNING speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will
The "Resume" function should only be not be capable of slowing the vehicle
operated if the driver is fully aware of the sufficiently to maintain the preset following
previously set speed and wishes to resume distance, which creates a danger of a
this particular preset speed. collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
G WARNING your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
Your undivided attention to street and traffic warning sound is intended as a final caution
conditions is necessary at all times whether in which you should intercede with your own
DISTRONIC PLUS is active or not. braking inputs to avoid a potentially
The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic operation of the warning signal to intercede
because conditions do not allow safe driving with your own braking. This will result in
at a constant speed. potentially dangerous emergency braking
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationary which will not always result in an impact being
objects on the road (for example, a vehicle avoided.
stopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle). Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react to
oncoming vehicles. G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2).
This corresponds to approximately 40% of
your vehicle's maximum braking force.
To avoid a collision, you must apply the brakes
yourself. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle
Driving systems 179
just enough to restore the preset speed or the As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
preset distance to the vehicle in front. it can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
G WARNING relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
If you do not receive visual or acoustic questions are asked about this.
Driving and parking

warning signals during a critical traffic i USA only:
situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not This device has been approved by the FCC
recognized the collision risk, has been as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
deactivated or is malfunctioning. sensor is intended for use in an automotive
Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers altering of the device will void any
responsibility to apply the brakes in order to warranties, and is not permitted by the
control the vehicle and avoid a collision. FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
General notes Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the
distance to the vehicle detected in front. i Canada only: This device complies with
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
that the set speed is not exceeded. subject to the following two conditions:
On long and steep downhill gradients, 1. This device may not cause interference,
especially if the vehicle is laden, you must and
select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By 2. this device must accept any interference
doing so, you will make use of the braking received, including interference that may
effect of the engine, which relieves the load cause undesired operation of the device.
on the brake system and prevents the brakes Removal, tampering, or altering of the
from overheating and wearing too quickly. device will void any warranties and is not
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order the device in any non-approved way.
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle Any unauthorized modification to this
in front. device could void the user's authority to
If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, operate the equipment.
the radar sensor system must be activated
(Y page 226) and operational.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
you, it operates in the speed range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
Z
180 Driving systems
Cruise control lever Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.

Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating while driving
Driving and parking
: To store the current speed or a higher

speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
? To store the current speed or calling up
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
the last stored speed
up : or down = until the desired speed
A To set the specified minimum distance
is set.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
pedal.
Important safety notes Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
G WARNING stored speed.
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate When driving at speeds below 20 mph
DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or if the vehicle in front has been detected and
by towing). is shown in the multifunction display. If the
vehicle in front is no longer detected and
Activation conditions displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the a tone sounds.
following conditions must be fulfilled: i If you do not fully release the accelerator
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
to two minutes after pulling away before message appears in the multifunction
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. display. The set distance to a slower-
Rthe parking brake must be released. moving vehicle in front will then not be
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
accelerator pedal.
Rthe hood must be closed.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Driving systems 181
Activating when driving towards a If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
stationary vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
you ; or press it up : or down =. selected is maintained.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
Driving and parking

in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
up : or down = until the desired speed
stored.
is set.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you Changing lanes
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your G WARNING
vehicle is stationary as well. DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at are only aids designed to assist driving.
under 20 mph (30km/h) if a vehicle in front They do not relieve you of the responsibility
has been detected. Therefore, the of paying attention. The driver remains fully
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the responsible for the vehicle's distance from
instrument cluster should be activated other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for
(Y page 221). braking in good time. Always pay attention to
traffic conditions and your surroundings.
i You can use the cruise control lever to set Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers
the stored speed and the control on the in time, cause an accident and injure yourself
cruise control lever to set the specified and others.
minimum distance (Y page 184).
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
Pulling away and driving
PLUS supports you when:
G WARNING Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph
When you step on the brake pedal, you switch (60 km/h).
off the DISTRONIC PLUS except when the
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
vehicle is at a standstill. The DISTRONIC PLUS
distance to a vehicle in front.
will no longer brake your vehicle. You are
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal.
always responsible for maintaining a distance
from other vehicles, observing road speeds RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
and braking well in advance. of collision.
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove is accelerated. Acceleration will be
your foot from the brake pedal. interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards or if the distance between your vehicle and
you ;, or press it up : or down =. the vehicle in front becomes too small.
or i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
X Accelerate briefly. monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
speed to that of the vehicle in front. drive vehicles.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
Z
182 Driving systems
Vehicles with COMAND/Audio 50 DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information

from your navigation system so that it can
react appropriately to certain traffic
situations. This is the case if, while following
a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:
Driving and parking
Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle

Rapproach a T-intersection
Rturn off at a freeway exit
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the

detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS
temporarily maintains the current driving
Example: traffic circle speed and does not accelerate. This is based
on the current map data in the navigation
i The following function is not operational system.
in all countries.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information
from your navigation system so that it can
react appropriately to certain traffic
situations. This is the case if, while following
a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:
Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle
Rapproach a T-intersection
Rturn off at a freeway exit
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the

detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS Example: traffic circle
temporarily maintains the current driving
The current speed is maintained:
speed and does not accelerate. This is based
on the current map data in the navigation Rapproximately ten seconds before the
system. traffic circle/T-intersection and for
The current speed is maintained: approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on
the traffic circle
Rapproximately 10 seconds before the Rapproximately twelve seconds before
traffic circle/T-intersection and
reaching a freeway exit and approximately
approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on
four seconds after the freeway exit
a traffic circle
Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
the set speed you specified.
a freeway exit and approximately
4 seconds after the freeway exit Stopping
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to G WARNING
the set speed you specified.
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC
Vehicles with COMAND PLUS is activated.
i The following function is not operational DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be
in all countries. operated, activated or deactivated by a
passenger or from outside the vehicle.
Driving systems 183
DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the X Shift the transmission to position P to
parking brake and must not be used for prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
parking. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The
The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is warning message in the multifunction
canceled and the vehicle can start moving if: display disappears.
Driving and parking

RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the The horn will also sound at regular intervals if
cruise control lever. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:
Ryou accelerate. Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an door and remove your seat belt
interruption in the power supply, e.g. Ropen the hood
battery failure. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
Rthe electrical system in the engine that the vehicle has been parked while
compartment, the battery or the fuses are DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound
tampered with. becomes louder if you attempt to lock the
Rthe battery is disconnected. vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,
deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the i If the engine has been switched off, it
vehicle against rolling away. cannot be started again until DISTRONIC
PLUS has been deactivated.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
malfunction occurs in the system or if there
it is stationary.
is a disruption in the power supply, the
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains Brake Immediately message is shown in
stationary and you do not need to depress the the multifunction display. Depress the brake
brake. firmly immediately until the warning message
i Depending on the specified minimum disappears from the multifunction display or
distance, your vehicle will come to a shift the transmission to position P.
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the control on the Setting a speed
cruise control lever.
G WARNING
You will see a warning message in the
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
multifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS is
until the vehicle has made the necessary
activated and:
adjustments.
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
seat belt is unfastened. a value that the prevailing road conditions and
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
automatically switched off by the ECO and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
start/stop function. of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
Rthe hood is opened. or serious injury to you and others.
Shift to 'P'
Z
184 Driving systems
Storing the current speed or calling up

a stored speed
G WARNING
The set speed stored in memory should only
Driving and parking
be set again if prevailing road conditions and

legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
? To store the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
A To set the specified minimum distance
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
you :.
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the point of resistance.
Every time the cruise control lever is pedal.
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored is increased or reduced.
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the point of resistance. Setting the specified minimum distance
Every time the cruise control lever is G WARNING
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
stored is increased or reduced. select the appropriate setting given road
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving
depress the accelerator pedal. If you
recommendations for safe following distance.
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Driving systems 185
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

speedometer
Driving and parking

You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
function, you can set the minimum distance
two segments ; in the set speed range light
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can up.
see this distance in the multifunction display If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
(Y page 185). segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
X To increase: turn control ; in direction
front : and stored speed = light up.
=. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater two segments ; in the set speed range light
distance between your vehicle and the up.
vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
X To decrease: turn control ; in segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
direction :. front : and stored speed = light up.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the i For design reasons, the speed displayed
vehicle in front. in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
safe distance from the vehicle in front. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if multifunction display
necessary.
General notes
You can select the distance display in the
Assistance menu (Y page 221)of the on-
board computer.
Z
186 Driving systems
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is X Select the Distance Display function

deactivated using the on-board computer
(Y page 221).
i You will see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC
Driving and parking
PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases
the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a
: Vehicle in front, if detected
speed below 20 mph (30km/h) by the system,
provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does not
; Distance indicator, current distance to detect a vehicle directly in front. At this point,
the vehicle in front the driver must apply the brakes in order to
= Specified minimum distance to the slow down further and bring the vehicle to a
vehicle in front; adjustable standstill.
? Own vehicle
X Select the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 221).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is

activated
There are several ways to deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS:
forwards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
; Own vehicle
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
= Specified minimum distance to the in the multifunction display for approximately
vehicle in front; adjustable five seconds.
? Vehicle in front, if detected
i The last speed stored remains stored until
You will see the stored speed for about five you switch off the engine.
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 187
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate

deactivated if: to the previously selected speed.
Ryou engage the parking brake. The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph distance between your vehicle and those
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, directly ahead of it. It may not register
Driving and parking

or if the vehicle in front is no longer stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
detected. Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ra disabled vehicle
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Ran oncoming vehicle
Ryou switch off the radar sensor system The driver must always be alert, observe all
(Y page 226). traffic and intercede as required by means of
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards steering or braking the vehicle.
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door is open. G WARNING
Rthe vehicle has skidded. The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will snowy or icy road conditions.
hear a warning tone. You will see the
The following contains descriptions of certain
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
road and traffic conditions in which you must
multifunction display for approximately five
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
seconds.
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC deactivated.
PLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system,
the Brake Immediately message appears in Cornering, going into and coming out of a
the multifunction display. Depress the brake bend
pedal immediately so that the vehicle does
not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated, and the message disappears.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNING
The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the
speed selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
following another vehicle ahead of you at your vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
set distance). vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC
PLUS could lose sight of the preceding
Z
188 Driving systems
Vehicles traveling on a different line because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
Other vehicles changing lanes obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the

vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the

vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
Driving systems 189
HOLD function X Make sure that the activation conditions

are met.
General notes X Depress the brake pedal.
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
following situations: until ë appears in the multifunction
Driving and parking

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep display.
slopes The HOLD function is activated. You can
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
release the brake pedal.
Rwhen waiting in traffic i If depressing the brake pedal the first
The vehicle is kept stationary without the time does not activate the HOLD function,
driver having to depress the brake pedal. wait briefly and then try again.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the Deactivating the HOLD function
accelerator pedal to pull away.
G WARNING
Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD
Activation conditions
function is activated.
You can activate the HOLD function if: The HOLD function must never be operated
Rthe vehicle is stationary. or deactivated by a passenger or from outside
Rthe engine is running or if it has been the vehicle.
automatically switched off by the ECO The HOLD function does not replace the
start/stop function. parking brake and must not be used for
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt parking.
is fastened. The braking effect of the HOLD function is
Rthe parking brake is released. canceled and the vehicle could roll away if:
Rthe hood is closed. Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. depressing the accelerator pedal or the
brake pedal.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
interruption in the power supply, e.g.
Activating the HOLD function
battery failure.
G WARNING Rthe electrical system in the engine
The vehicle's brakes are applied when the compartment, the battery or the fuses are
HOLD function is activated. For this reason, tampered with.
deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is Rthe battery is disconnected.
to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate
car wash or by towing). the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
The HOLD function is deactivated

automatically if:
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
Z
190 Driving systems
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a Dynamic handling package with
certain amount of pressure until ë sports mode
disappears from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. General notes
You will see a warning message in the The most important part of the dynamic
Driving and parking
multifunction display if the HOLD function is handling package with sports mode is the
activated and: adjustable damping system. This
Rthe automatically controls and adapts the
driver's door is open and the driver's
suspension to the respective driving
seat belt is unfastened.
situation.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
The calibration of the suspension depends
automatically switched off by the ECO
on:
start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened. Ryour driving style
Rthe road surface conditions
Shift to 'P'
Ryour individual selection; see the following
X Shift the transmission to position P to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away. description
The HOLD function is deactivated. The The dynamic handling package with sports
warning message in the multifunction mode also includes steering wheel paddle
display disappears. shifters (Y page 160) with a manual drive
program (Y page 162).
A horn will also sound at regular intervals if
the HOLD function is activated and you:
Sports tuning
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
door and remove your seat belt
Ropen the hood
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact

that the vehicle has been parked while the
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD
function is deactivated.
i If the engine has been switched off, it
cannot be started again until the HOLD
Example: position of dynamic handling package
function has been deactivated. with sports mode button
If there is a malfunction in the system or The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
power supply while the HOLD function is sports mode ensures even better contact
activated, the Brake Immediately message with the road. Select this mode when
is shown in the multifunction display. employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
Immediately depress the brake firmly until winding country roads.
the warning message in the multifunction
X Start the engine.
display goes out.
X Press button ;.
You can also shift the transmission to position
P. This deactivates the HOLD function. Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports
suspension tuning is selected. Depending
on the engine output, the accelerator pedal
Driving systems 191
is more responsive. On vehicles with i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum

automatic transmission, drive program S is effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
selected. you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
i Your selection remains stored until you
switch off the engine. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are
Driving and parking

permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it
Comfort tuning improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a drive wheel spins due to
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics insufficient grip.
of your vehicle are more comfortable.
Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
more comfortable driving style. Select PARKTRONIC
comfort mode also when driving fast on
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of Important safety notes
freeway.
G WARNING
X Press button ;.
The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.
Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles need for extreme care. The responsibility
with automatic transmission, drive during parking and other critical maneuvers
program E is selected. always remains with the driver.
G WARNING
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
G WARNING
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
injured.
traction:
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
possible. ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator audibly the distance between your vehicle
pedal. and an object.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
prevailing road conditions. you:
Failure to observe these guidelines could Rswitch on the ignition
cause the vehicle to skid. Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
4MATIC cannot prevent accidents resulting Rrelease the parking brake
from excessive speed. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lower
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle speeds.
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
wheels must remain either on the ground
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
Z
192 Driving systems
Range of the sensors

General notes
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
Driving and parking
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
Example: side view
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Example: top view
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40in (approx.
100cm)
Corners Approx. 24in (approx.
: Example: sensors in the front bumper, 60cm)
left-hand side
Rear sensors
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
slush. Otherwise, they may not function Center Approx. 48in (approx.
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking 120cm)
care not to scratch or damage them
Corners Approx. 32in (approx.
(Y page 304).
80cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
Driving systems 193
below the minimum, the distance may no One or more segments light up as the vehicle
longer be shown. approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
Warning displays From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
Driving and parking

intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents. : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
The warning display for the rear area in the ; Indicator lamp
Coupe is located on the headliner in the rear
compartment; in the Cabriolet, it is between If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
the rear seats. deactivated.
The warning display for each side of the i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if in the ignition lock.
yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position
determines which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
Transmission Warning display
position
D Front area activated
R or N Rear and front areas
activated
P No areas activated
Z
194 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20 seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 304).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
approximately ultrasound waves.
20 seconds.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Parking Guidance changes position or objects in the parking

space are moved.
Even when using Parking Guidance, you are
G WARNING still responsible for driving carefully. If you
Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may rely on Parking Guidance alone, you could
display parking spaces that are not suitable cause an accident and injure yourself and
for parking, for example: others.
Safety always remains your responsibility and
Rno-parking areas
you must continue paying careful attention to
Rparking spaces with unsuitable surfaces your immediate surroundings when parking
(road surface) and maneuvering.
Rdriveways
Rentrances and exits G WARNING
Parking Guidance detects and measures Objects located above the height range of
potential parking spaces while driving past. Parking Guidance will not be detected when
Changes to the parking space after this point the parking space is measured. These objects
are not taken into account, for example if the are not taken into account when the parking
vehicle in front of or behind the parking space procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
Driving systems 195
vehicles. Under some circumstances, Parking Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC

Guidance might therefore issue steering (Y page 193) warning messages during the
instructions too soon. This may lead to a parking procedure.
collision. For this reason, you should avoid Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes
using Parking Guidance in such situations. from your vehicle, you must not use Parking
Driving and parking

Guidance.
G WARNING Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow
Make sure that no persons or animals are in chains or an emergency spare wheel
the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they installed.
could be injured. Rmake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct effect on
! Pay particular attention to low objects or the steering instructions.
objects with flat surfaces, such as trailer Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
drawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs.
parking space after parking is dependent
These types of objects cannot be detected
on various factors. These include the
by Parking Guidance and may damage the
position and shape of the vehicles parked
vehicle.
in front and behind it and the conditions of
! If unavoidable, you should drive over the location. In some cases, Parking
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at Guidance may guide you too far or not far
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage enough into a parking space. In some
the wheels or tires. cases, it may also lead you across or onto
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to procedure with Parking Guidance.
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle.
A suitable parking space is indicated by the Detecting a parking space
parking symbol. You receive steering
instructions when parking. You may also use
PARKTRONIC (Y page 191).
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
Guidance is also unavailable.
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel : Detected parking space on the left
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends ; Parking symbol
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
= Detected parking space on the right
not on the pavement, for example. Parking
Guidance may not detect flat curbs Parking Guidance is automatically activated
Parking tips: when you drive forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
space as close as possible. system independently locates and measures
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars When driving at speeds below 19 mph
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
space being measured inaccurately.
Z
196 Driving systems
When a parking space has been detected, an X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
arrow towards the right = or the left : also symbol shows the desired parking space in
appears. Parking Guidance only displays the instrument cluster.
parking spaces on the front-passenger side X Shift the transmission to position R.
as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's The multifunction display shows the
Driving and parking
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal Check Vehicle Surroundings Press
on the driver's side is activated. To park on 'OK' to Confirm message.
the driver's side, you must leave the driver's X Press the a button on the multifunction
side turn signal switched on until you have steering wheel to confirm.
engaged reverse gear. The multifunction display switches to
Parking Guidance will only detect parking Parking Guidance.
spaces: Depending on your distance from the
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel parking space, the Please Drive
Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide Backward message will appear in the
Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than multifunction display.
your vehicle X If necessary, reverse towards the parking
A parking space is displayed while you are space. This is indicated by an arrow
driving past it, and until you are pointing backwards.
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Continue backing up until you hear a tone.
Stop – the parking position has been
Parking reached. The arrow is white.
The Please Steer Wheel to the
Important safety notes Right or Please Steer Wheel to the
G WARNING Left message appears in the multifunction
The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may display.
not detect all obstacles. The Parking
Backing up into the parking space
Guidance does not relieve you of the
responsibility to pay attention. You are always
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your immediate surroundings
when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,
you could endanger yourself and others.
Moving the vehicle into the stop position

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel in the specified direction
until the arrow is white and a warning tone
sounds.
X To reverse into the parking space:
maintain the steering wheel angle and
reverse carefully.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
The vehicle has reached the position in
which you need to countersteer.
Driving systems 197
The Please Steer Wheel to the Left Rear view camera

or Please Steer Wheel to the Right
message appears in the multifunction Important safety notes
display.
G WARNING
X Countersteering: while the vehicle is
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
Driving and parking

stationary, turn the steering wheel in the
the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they
specified direction until the arrow is white
could be injured.
and a warning tone sounds.
X To reverse into the parking space:
maintain the steering wheel angle and
General notes
reverse carefully.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone.
The Parking Guidance Finished
message appears in the multifunction
display and a tone sounds. You may be
asked to steer in a different direction and
then change gear. In this case, further
displays in the multifunction display will
direct you to the final position.
X Maneuver if necessary.
X Always observe the warning messages
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 193).
Canceling Parking Guidance

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
center console (Y page 193).
Parking Guidance is canceled immediately
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if Example: Sedan
it is no longer possible to guide you into the Rear view camera : is an optical parking aid.
parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the
The parking space symbol goes out and a COMAND display.
warning tone sounds. The Parking Rear view camera : is located in the handle
Guidance Canceled message appears in the strip of the tailgate.
Z
198 Driving systems
View through the camera recommends that you consult a Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose.
G WARNING
Do not use the rear view camera in these
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
situations. You could otherwise injure
display obstacles
yourself and other people and/or cause
Driving and parking
Rfrom a distorted perspective damage - including damage to your vehicle -

Rinaccurately while parking/maneuvering.
Rmay not display obstacles at all
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
The rear view camera does not relieve you of mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
Activating the rear view camera
camera may not show objects which are
Rvery X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the rear view camera
Rabove the tailgate handle
function is selected in COMAND (see the
You are responsible for safety at all times and separate operating instructions for
must continue to pay attention to the COMAND).
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
COMAND display with guide lines.
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G WARNING Guide lines in the COMAND display

The rear view camera will not function or will G WARNING
not fully function if:
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
Rthe tailgate is open
you are color-blind or have impaired color
Rit is raining or snowing strongly or if it is vision.
foggy Only use rear view camera if you can see and
Rit is night or if you are parking/ distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
maneuvering your vehicle in a very dark rear view camera on the COMAND system
area display.
Ra very bright white light is affecting the
camera G WARNING
Rthe immediate vicinity is illuminated with Please note that objects that do not touch the
fluorescent light (the display can flicker) ground may appear to be further away than
Rtemperature changes abruptly, for example they actually are, for example:
if you drive out of the cold into a heated Rthe bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
garage (condensation on the lens) Rthe trailer drawbar
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged Rthe rear end of a truck
In this case, have the position and the Ra slanted post
setting of the camera checked at a
In such cases, you should not use the guide
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
lines to judge the distance. You may misjudge
Driving systems 199
the distance, which increases the risk of may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause
impacting the objects. an accident and injure yourself and others.
Even if the object you approach is directly on
the ground, do not approach the object any General notes
closer than the red guide line.
Driving and parking

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys such as on freeways
and interstate highways. It is active in the
range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and
112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Example: information in the COMAND display
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
Guide lines ; and = show the approximate
characteristics
distance to the rear area. Yellow guide
Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time
line ; indicates a distance of approximately
3 ft (1 m) and red guide line = indicates a The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m). The restricted and warnings may be delayed or
distances only apply to objects that are at not occur at all:
ground level. Blue guide lines : depict the Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
width required for the vehicle. They are used surface is uneven or if there are potholes
to align the vehicle with the edge of the road, Rif there is a strong side wind
e.g. the curb. Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
ATTENTION ASSIST Rif you are predominantly driving slower
Important safety notes than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than

112 mph (180 km/h)
G WARNING Rif you are currently using COMAND or
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may making a telephone call with it
detect your tiredness or lapses in Rif the time has been set incorrectly
concentration too late or not at all. It is not a Rin active driving situations, such as when
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
you change lanes or change your speed
driver.
Fatigue may cause you to recognize
hazardous situations too late, misjudge a
situation or react more slowly. For this
reason, make sure you feel rested before you
begin driving and during your journey. Make
sure that you take regular breaks in time,
particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, you
Z
200 Driving systems
Warning and display messages in the Lane Tracking package

multifunction display
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 200) and Lane Keeping
Driving and parking
Assist (Y page 202).
Blind Spot Assist
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be Important safety notes

warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your G WARNING
journey has begun. You then hear an Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
intermittent warning tone twice and the assist driving. It may fail to detect some
Attention Assist: Take a Break! vehicles and is no substitute for attentive
message appears in the multifunction driving.
display. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow
board computer (Y page 222). vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
Symbol : appears in the multifunction may only detect them too late.
display. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,
X If necessary, take a break. strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
X Press the a button to confirm the rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles
message. are detected late or not at all.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
do not take a break, you will be warned again
and injure yourself and others.
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The
precondition for this is that i USA only:
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in This device has been approved by the FCC
concentration. as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
continue your journey and starts assessing altering of the device will void any
your tiredness again if: warranties, and is not permitted by the
Ryou switch off the engine. FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the any non-approved way.
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or Any unauthorized modification to this
to take a break. device could void the user’s authority to
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
Driving systems 201
display in the exterior mirrors draws your

attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible
Driving and parking

collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
purposes.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be
activated (Y page 226) and operational.
Monitoring range of the sensors
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles
Example: Coupe
that approach and drive past at high speeds
are not detected. There is no display and no The Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
warning. 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
possible to monitor the complete width of the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
the next lane may not be detected, especially be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
if they are driving in a staggered formation. driving in the middle of their lane. This may
This may be the case if vehicles are driving at be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
that edge of their lane which is furthest away inner edge of their lanes.
from your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system:
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and Rwarnings may be issued in error when
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to driving close to crash barriers or similar
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident solid lane borders.
and injure yourself and others. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, for example
trucks, for a prolonged time.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free
from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to
the bumpers, have the function of the sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
properly.
Z
202 Driving systems
Indicator and warning display Collision warning

G WARNING If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The corresponding turn signal, a double warning
indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
Driving and parking
yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
then not indicated. are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Switching on Blind Spot Assist
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 226) and Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 223) are activated in the on-board
computer.
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : light up red in the
exterior mirrors for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
G WARNING
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). detect the lane markings on the road
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the incorrectly or not at all.
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
The system may be impaired or may not
is operational.
function if:
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray.
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or
the warning only occurs if the difference in covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h). vicinity of the camera.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot are present.
Assist is no longer active. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
The brightness of the indicator/warning covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
lamps is adjusted automatically according to Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
the ambient light. small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
Driving systems 203
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, by means of intermittent vibration in the
e.g. near roadworks. steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
Driving and parking

Rthe road is narrow and winding.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and

traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
style to suit the prevailing road and weather the on-board computer; to do so, select
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic Standard or Adaptive(Y page 223).
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, Symbol : appears in the multifunction
you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
display.
cause an accident and injure yourself and
others. If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)
and lane markings are detected,
General notes symbol : is highlighted. Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in Adaptive

front of your vehicle by means of a If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration
camera : at the top of the windshield. Lane occurs if:
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
road and warns you before you leave your the warnings are suppressed for a certain
lane unintentionally. period of time.
If you have selected km as the display unit in Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
the Display Unit Speed-/ ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Odometer(Y page 224) function in the on- Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
board computer, Lane Keeping Assist assists Ryou brake hard.
you at speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
selected as the display unit, the assistance
obstacle or change lane quickly.
range starts at 40 mph.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
Z
204 Driving systems
lane marking, the system recognizes certain style to suit the prevailing road and weather
conditions and warns you accordingly. conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
The warning vibration occurs earlier if: conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
bend. cause an accident and injure yourself and
Driving and parking
others.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
freeway. i USA only:
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
This device has been approved by the FCC
The warning vibration occurs later if: as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
Rthe road has narrow lanes. sensor is intended for use in an automotive
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
Active Driving Assistance package FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
General notes Any unauthorized modification to this
The Active Driving Assistance package device could void the user’s authority to
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177), operate the equipment.
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 204) and i Canada only: This device complies with
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 208). RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Active Blind Spot Assist 1. This device may not cause interference,
and
G WARNING received, including interference that may
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, and cause undesired operation of the device.
may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or Removal, tampering, or altering of the
not at all. device will void any warranties and is not
The system may be impaired or may not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
function if: the device in any non-approved way.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, Any unauthorized modification to this
rain, fog or spray. device could void the user's authority to
Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. operate the equipment.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect General notes
narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
bicycles, or may only detect them too late. It system to monitor the side areas of your
cannot detect vehicles that are overtaken at vehicle which are in back of the driver. A
a small distance and then enter the blind spot warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
area. your attention to vehicles detected in the
Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road monitored area. If you then switch on the
and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
attentive driving. You are responsible for the will also receive an optical and audible
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and warning. If a risk of lateral collision is
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving detected, corrective braking may help you
Driving systems 205
avoid a collision. To support the course-

correcting brake application, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar
sensor system. The free space in the direction
of travel is then evaluated.
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h).
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
be activated (Y page 226) and operational.
Monitoring area
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain
areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
Vehicles that approach and drive past at high Example: Coupe
speeds are not detected. No visual nor
audible warnings are emitted and the system Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
does not brake the vehicle to correct your to 10 ft (3.0m) behind your vehicle and
course. directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.
possible to monitor the complete width of the
neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
the next lane may not be detected, especially lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
if they are driving in a staggered formation. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
This may be the case if vehicles are driving at driving in the middle of their lane. This may
that edge of their lane which is furthest away be the case if there are vehicles at the inner
from your vehicle. edge of your lane.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and Due to the nature of the system:
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Rwarnings may be issued in error when
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident driving close to crash barriers or similar
and injure yourself and others. solid lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, for example
trucks, for a prolonged time.
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers
and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
rear sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Z
206 Driving systems
specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist The brightness of the indicator/warning
may otherwise no longer work properly. lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Indicator and warning display
G WARNING Visual and audible collision warnings
When you switch on the turn signals to
Driving and parking
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds

below 20 mph (30km/h). The indicator lamps change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the
in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in side monitoring range, you receive a visual
the monitoring range are then not indicated. and acoustic collision warning. You then hear
a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
detected vehicles are indicated by the
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no
further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute
for attentive driving. In some cases, the
course-correcting brake application is not
sufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case,
you must steer, brake or accelerate.
In very rare cases, the system may
erroneously detect a danger of collision in the
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
area of crash barriers or similar lane borders
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assist
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights does not detect all traffic situations and road
up yellow at speeds of up to users. Always make sure that there is
20 mph(30km/h). At speeds above sufficient distance on the side for other traffic
20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes or obstacles. An inappropriate brake
out and Active Blind Spot Assist is application may be interrupted at any time if
operational. you steer slightly in the opposite direction or
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring accelerate.
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above You are responsible for driving at appropriate
20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the speeds, braking in good time, and steering
corresponding side lights up red. This warning correctly. Always adapt your driving style to
is always given when a vehicle enters the suit the prevailing road and weather
blind spot monitoring range from behind or conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
the warning only occurs if the difference in you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h). cause an accident and injure yourself and
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse others.
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
Spot Assist is no longer active.
Driving systems 207
RESP® is switched off.

Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
Driving and parking

X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 226) and Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 223) are activated in the on-board
computer.
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Active Lane Keeping Assist

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a G WARNING
course-correcting brake application is carried Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and
collision. may detect the lane markings on the road
If a course-correcting brake application incorrectly or not at all.
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the The system may be impaired or may not
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone function if:
sounds. The display shown in the illustration Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
also appears in the multifunction display. inadequate illumination of the road surface,
The course-correcting brake application is snow, rain, fog or spray.
available in the speed range between Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
20 mph(30 km/h) and120 mph(200 km/h). the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.
Either no braking application, or a course- Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or
correcting brake application adapted to the covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
driving situation occurs, if: vicinity of the camera.
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
barriers, located on both sides of your are present.
vehicle. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
side. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with small, and as a result the lane markings
high cornering speeds. cannot be recognized.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. e.g. near roadworks.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
Z
208 Driving systems
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. by means of intermittent vibration in the
branch off, cross or merge. steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Rthe road is narrow and winding. In order that you are warned only when
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect necessary and in good time if you cross the
road and traffic conditions. It is not a lane marking, the system recognizes certain
Driving and parking
substitute for attentive driving. You are conditions and warns you accordingly.
responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
good time and steering correctly. Always Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing bend.
road and weather conditions. Always pay Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
attention to traffic conditions and your freeway.
surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
and injure yourself and others. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
General notes Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute
for attentive driving. In some cases, the lane-
correcting brake application is not sufficient
to bring your vehicle back to the original lane.
In such cases, you must steer the vehicle
yourself to ensure that it does not leave the
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area lane.
in front of your vehicle by means of a
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
camera : at the top of the windshield. Active
road and traffic conditions. Always make sure
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on that there is sufficient distance to the side for
the road and warns you before you leave your other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases,
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the unclear markings or particular structures on
warning, a lane-correcting application of the the roadway can be recognized as solid lane
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the markings. An inappropriate brake application,
original lane. e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane
In the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: marking, may be interrupted at any time by
on-board computer function (Y page 224), if steering slightly in the opposite direction.
you select the km display unit, Active Lane- Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
Keeping Assist is activated at a speed of weather conditions into account.
60 km/h. If the Miles display unit is selected,
You are responsible for the driving at
the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and
Warning vibration in the steering wheel steering correctly. Always adapt your driving
A warning may be given if a front wheel style to suit the prevailing road and weather
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
Driving systems 209
you may fail to recognize dangers in time, RESP® is switched off.

cause an accident and injure yourself and Rthe transmission is not in position D.
others. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
Driving and parking

traffic situations or road users. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.
Ruse a turn signal.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Rclearly brake or accelerate.
the display shown in the illustration appears
A lane-correcting brake application is
in the multifunction display.
interrupted automatically if:
If you leave your lane under certain
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
on one side. This is meant to assist you in ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application can only
be made after driving over a solid,
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
warning must be given by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized. The brake
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
application also slightly reduces vehicle
speed. the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 223).
i A further lane-correcting brake Symbol : appears in the multifunction
application can only occur after your display.
vehicle has returned to the original lane. If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)
No lane-correcting brake application occurs and lane markings are detected,
if: symbol : is highlighted. Active Lane
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or Keeping Assist is ready for use.
accelerate. If Standard is selected, no warning
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
high cornering speeds or high rates of If Adaptive is selected, no warning
acceleration. vibration occurs if:
Z
210 Driving systems
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In

this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Driving and parking
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
an obstacle or change lane quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
211
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 213
Menus and submenus ...................... 216
Display messages ............................. 228
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 256
212 Important safety notes
Useful information If you must continue to drive, do so with added

caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-

i This Operator's Manual describes all Benz Center as soon as possible.
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the G WARNING
time of publication of the Operator's Malfunction and warning messages are only
Manual. Country-specific differences are displayed for certain systems and are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may intentionally not very detailed. The
not be equipped with all features malfunction and warning messages are
described. This also applies to safety- simply a reminder with respect to the
related systems and functions. operation of certain systems. They do not
i Read the information on qualified replace the owner's and/or driver's
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). responsibility to maintain the vehicle's
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance services and safety checks
Important safety notes performed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
address the malfunction and warning
G WARNING messages.
The driver's concentration must always be
directed primarily at road traffic. G WARNING
For your safety and the safety of others, All categories of messages contain important
selecting features through the multifunction information which should be taken note of
steering wheel should only be done by the and, where a malfunction is indicated,
driver when traffic and road conditions permit addressed as soon as possible at an
it to be done safely. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph Failure to repair the condition noted may
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
second. damage or personal injury.
G WARNING For an illustration of the instrument cluster,

No messages will be displayed if either the see (Y page 29).
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside temperature
Rwarning/indicator lamps
Rmalfunction/warning messages
Rfailure of any systems
Driving characteristics may be impaired.

Displays and operation 213
Displays and operation

Instrument cluster
: Fuel gauge
; Time
= Speedometer with segments (Y page 214)
? Multifunction display (Y page 215)
A Tachometer (Y page 214)
B Coolant temperature (Y page 213)
C Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 213)
i You can set the time using COMAND; see the separate Operating Instructions.
Instrument lighting i The light sensor in the instrument cluster

automatically controls the brightness of
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the the multifunction display.
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the brightness In daylight, the displays in the instrument
control knob. cluster are not illuminated.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster Coolant temperature display
(Y page 29).
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise G WARNING
or counter-clockwise. Driving when your engine is overheated can
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or cause some fluids which may have leaked into
L, the brightness is dependent upon the engine compartment to catch fire. You
the brightness of the ambient light. could be seriously burned.
Z
214 Displays and operation
Steam from an overheated engine can cause Speedometer with segments

serious burns which can occur just by opening

The segments in the speedometer indicate
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
which speed range is available.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
RCruise control activated (Y page 174):
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the The segments light up from the stored
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until speed to the maximum speed.
the engine has cooled down. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 177):
One or two segments in the set speed

! A display message is shown if the coolant range light up.
temperature is too high. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
If the coolant temperature is over
The segments between the speed of the
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
engine will otherwise be damaged.
up.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 29). Operating the on-board computer
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant Overview
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

G WARNING
The outside temperature indicator is not : Multifunction display
designed to serve as an ice-warning device ; Switches on the Voice Control System;
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. see the separate operating instructions
Indicated temperatures just above the = Right control panel
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
? Left control panel
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. A Back button
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
The outside temperature display is in the the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
multifunction display (Y page 215). lock.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Displays and operation 215
You can control the multifunction display and Right control panel

the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering ~ RRejectsor ends a call
wheel. RExits
phone book/redial
memory
Left control panel
6 RMakes or accepts a call
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar RSwitches to the redial memory
; W RAdjusts the volume
9 Press briefly: X
: RScrolls in lists 8 RMute
RSelects a submenu or function

RIn the Audio menu: selects a Back button
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene % Press briefly:
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: RBack
switches to the phone book and RSwitches off the Voice Control
selects a name or telephone System; see the separate
number operating instructions
RHides display messages/calls
9 Press and hold:
up the last Trip menu function
: RIn the Audio menu: selects the used
previous/next station or selects RExits the telephone book/redial
an audio track or a video scene
memory
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: % Press and hold:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone RCalls up the standard display in
book is open the Trip menu
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: Multifunction display
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
: Description field
; Menu bar
= Drive program (Y page 158)
Z
216 Menus and submenus
? Permanent display: outside temperature RServ. menu (Y page 223)

or speed (Y page 224) RSett. menu (Y page 223)

A Transmission position (Y page 158)
X To show menu bar ;: press the =
Trip menu
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Standard display
Text field : shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 194)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 174)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist X Press and hold the % button on the
(Y page 127) steering wheel until the Trip menu with
À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 199) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
¤ ECO start/stop function shown.
(Y page 154)
Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 202) Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist Reset"
(Y page 207)
ë HOLD function (Y page 189)
Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview Example: trip computer "From Start"
: Distance
Press the = or ; button on the
; Time
steering wheel to call up the menu bar and
select a menu. = Average speed
Operating the on-board computer ? Average fuel consumption
(Y page 214). X Press the = or ; button on the
Depending on the equipment installed in the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: X Press 9 or : to select From Start
RTrip menu (Y page 216) or From Reset.
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) The values in the From Start submenu are
(Y page 218) calculated from the start of a journey whilst
RAudio menu (Y page 219) the values in the From Reset submenu are
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 220) calculated from the last time the submenu
RDriveAssist menu (assistance) was reset (Y page 217).
(Y page 221) The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset when:
Menus and submenus 217
RThe ignition has been switched off for more a vehicle being refueled C instead of the

than four hours. range.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. Digital speedometer
The From Reset trip computer is
automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
ECO display
: Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
Example: ECO display
X Press the = or ; button on the Resetting values
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Select ECO DISPLAY with 9 or :.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer

than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 170).
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
Displaying the range and current fuel X Press the = or ; button on the
consumption steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following
X Press the = or ; button on the functions:
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. Rtripodometer
X Press the 9 or : button to select the R"From Start" trip computer
current fuel consumption and approximate R"From Reset" trip computer
range. RECO display
The approximate range that can be covered i When you reset the values in the "ECO
depends on the fuel level and your current display", the values in the trip computer
driving style. If there is only a small amount "From start" are likewise reset. When you
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows reset the values in the trip computer "From
Z
start", the values in the "ECO display"are Change of direction announced without a
likewise reset. lane recommendation
Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information on navigation, see the separate : Road into which the change of direction
operating instructions. leads
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate ; Distance to change of direction and visual
operating instructions). distance display
X Press the = or ; button on the = Change-of-direction icon
steering wheel to select the Navi menu. When a change of direction has been
announced, you will see visual distance
Route guidance not active display ; next to the symbol for change of
direction =. This shortens from the bottom
to the top of the display as you approach the
point of the announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Direction of travel
; Current street
Route guidance active

No change of direction announced : Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Lane recommendation
? Uninterrupted lane
A New lane during a change of direction
: Distance to the destination B Change-of-direction icon
; Distance to the next change of direction
On multilane roads, the system can display
= Current street lane recommendation = for the next change
? Symbol "follow the road's course" of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.
Other status indicators of the i For information on switching waveband

navigation system and storing stations; see the separate
RO: you have reached the destination or an
operating instructions.
intermediate destination. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
RNew Route... or Calculating Route: normal radio.
calculating a new route For more information on satellite radio
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle operation, see the separate operating
position is outside the area of the digital instructions.
map (off-map position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to Operating audio player or audio media
the selected destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
Display CD/DVD changer (example)

: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
: Waveband X Switch on COMAND and activate audio
; Station frequency with memory position CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the
separate operating instructions.
i Station ; is displayed with the station X Press the = or ; button on the
frequency or station name. The memory steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
position is only displayed along with
X To select the next/previous track:
station ; if this has been stored.
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND X To select a track from the track list
and select Radio; see the separate (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
operating instructions. 9 or : button until desired
X Press the = or ; button on the track : has been reached.
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
X To select a stored station: briefly press
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
the 9 or : button. audio drives or data carriers support this
X To select a station from the station function.
list: press and briefly hold the 9 If track information is stored on the audio
or : button. device or medium, the multifunction display
If no station list is received: will show the number and title of the track.
X To select a station using the station The current track does not appear in audio
search: press and briefly hold the 9 AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
or : button. audio source connected).
Z
Video DVD operation X Switch on the mobile phone (see the

separate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to
COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
Display CD/DVD changer (example) steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
: Current scene
You will see one of the following display
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; messages in the multifunction display:
see the separate operating instructions. RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. network and is ready to receive.
X To select the next/previous scene: RPhone No Service: there is no network
briefly press the 9 or : button. available or the mobile phone is searching
X To select a scene from the scene list for a network.
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired Accepting a call
scene : has been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNING
The driver's attention to the road must always Example: incoming call
be his/her primary focus when driving. For X Press the 6 button on the steering
your safety and the safety of others, we wheel to accept an incoming call.
recommend that you pull over to a safe If someone calls you when you are in the
location and stop before placing or taking a Tel menu, a display message appears in the
telephone call. If you choose to use the multifunction display.
telephone while driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
You can accept a call even if you are not in
road, weather and traffic conditions permit. the Tel menu.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
Rejecting or ending a call
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph X Press the ~ button on the steering
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers wheel.
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) You can end or reject a call even if you are not
every second. in the Tel menu.
Dialing a number from the phone book Assistance menu

X Press the = or ; button on the Introduction
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
desired name.
or
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
one second. following options:
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the Rshow the distance display (Y page 221)
button or reach the end of the list. Ractivate/deactivate ESP®(Y page 222)
X If only one telephone number is stored Ractivate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake
for a name: press the 6 or a button (Y page 222)
to start dialing. Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST
or (Y page 222)
X If there is more than one number for a Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or
particular name: press the 6 or a Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 223)
button to display the numbers. Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 223)
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start Showing the distance display
dialing.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
or
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X To exit the telephone book: press the
X Press the 9 or : button to select
~ or % button.
Distance Display.
Redialing The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
The on-board computer saves the last names appears in the multifunction display
or numbers dialed in the redial memory. (Y page 185).
X Press the = or ; button on the If the Sensors Deactivated message
steering wheel to select the Tel menu. appears, the radar sensor system is
X Press the 6 button to switch to the deactivated.
redial memory. X Activate the radar sensor system
X Press the 9 or : button to select the (Y page 226).

desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button.
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP® Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

Brake
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased with DISTRONIC PLUS.
risk of skidding and an accident. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations to select the DriveAssist menu.
described in the following. X Press the 9 or : button to select
PRE-SAFE Brake.
For further information about ESP®, see X Press the a button.
(Y page 66).
The current selection is displayed.
X Start the engine.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the
X Press 9 or : to select ESP.
multifunction display shows the Ä symbol
X Press the a button. as long as the HOLD function is not activated
The current selection is displayed. (Y page 189).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if
button again. PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp at a speed under 22 mph (35km/h) the j
in the instrument cluster lights up symbol for Parking Guidance is displayed
continuously when the engine is running. instead of the Ä symbol (Y page 194)
If the ä warning lamp and the å If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not Deactivated message appears, the radar
available due to a malfunction. sensor system is deactivated.
X Switch on the radar sensor system
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations: (Y page 226).
Rwhen using snow chains For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
Rin deep snow see (Y page 67).
Ron sand or gravel
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
Observe the information on warning lamps ASSIST
(Y page 259).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 229). to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Attention
Assist.
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the
À symbol appears in the multifunction
display when the ignition is on.
For further information about ATTENTION Service menu

ASSIST, see (Y page 199).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist
Blind Spot Asst.. In the Serv. menu, you have the following
options:
Rcalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 228)
Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning
button again.
system (Y page 329)
If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors Rchecking the tire pressure electronically
Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst. (Y page 330)
Sensors Deactivated message appears,
Rcalling up when a service is due
the radar sensor system is deactivated.
(Y page 298)
X Switch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 226).
For further information about Blind Spot Settings menu
Assist, see (Y page 200).
Introduction
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 204).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
X Press the 9 or : button to select In the Sett. menu, you have the following
Lane Keep. Asst. options:
X Press the a button. Rchange the instrument cluster settings
The current selection is displayed. (Y page 224)
X Press a to confirm. Rchange the light settings (Y page 224)
Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 225)
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol Rchange the convenience settings
appears in the multifunction display when the (Y page 226)
ignition is on. Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 227)
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 207).
Z
Instrument cluster X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Permanent Display: function.

Selecting the unit of measurement for You will see the selected setting Outside
distance Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: (USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada).
function allows you to choose whether X Press the a button to save the setting.
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles
in the multifunction display. i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
You can determine whether the multifunction (Canada).
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers. Lights
X Press the = or ; button on the Switching the daytime running lamps on/
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. off
X Press the : or 9 button to select the i This function is not available in Canada.
Inst. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Lights submenu.
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles. X Press : or 9 to select the Day
X Press the a button to save the setting. Lights: function.

If the Day Lights: have been switched on,
The selected unit of measurement for the cone of light and the W symbol in
distance applies to: the multifunction display are shown in red.
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu X Press the a button to save the setting.
Rodometer and the trip odometer Further information on daytime running
Rtrip computer
lamps (Y page 121).
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
off
menu
Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Lights submenu.
Selecting the permanent display function X Press a to confirm.
You can determine whether the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display permanently shows your speed or the Adaptive Highbeam function.
outside temperature. If the Adaptive Highbeam function has
X Press the = or ; button on the been switched on, the cone of light and the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. _ symbol in the upper multifunction
display are shown in red.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Inst. Cluster submenu.
For further information about Adaptive i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,

Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 127). when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
Activating/deactivating surround following light up:
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
RParking lamps
switch-off
RFront fog lamps
RLow-beam headlamps
RDaytime running lamps
RSide marker lamps
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm. RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
X Press : or 9 to select the Activating/deactivating the interior

Surround Lighting function. lighting delayed switch-off
When the Surround Lighting function is If you activate the Interior Lighting
activated, the light cone and the area Delay function, the interior lighting remains
around the vehicle are displayed in red in on for 20seconds after you remove the
the multifunction display. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
exterior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Lights submenu.
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press a to confirm.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Press : or 9 to select the Light.
ignition lock. Delay function.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is When the Interior Lighting Delay
deactivated. function is activated, the vehicle interior is
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is displayed in red in the multifunction
reactivated the next time you start the display.
engine. X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you have activated the Surround
Lighting function and the light switch is set Vehicle
to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark: Activating/deactivating the automatic
RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting door locking mechanism
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking X Press the = or ; button on the
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
the surround lighting is switched off and X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
the automatic headlamp mode is activated submenu.
(Y page 121). X Press a to confirm.
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close
all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 5 seconds.
Z
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. The following systems are switched off when
Door Locks function. the radar sensor system is deactivated:

When the Automatic Door Lock function RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177)
is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed RBAS PLUS (Y page 65)
in red in the multifunction display.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 200)
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 204)
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
Convenience
For further information on the automatic
locking feature, see (Y page 80). Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal G WARNING
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, You must make sure no one can become
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the trapped or injured by the moving steering
vehicle. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment lever or press one
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
of the memory position buttons.
submenu.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Children could open the driver's door and
Acoustic Lock function. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, feature, which could result in an accident
the & symbol in the multifunction and/or serious personal injury.
display lights up red.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor X Press the : or 9 button to select the
system Convenience submenu.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press a to confirm.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press : or 9 to select the Easy
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle Entry/Exit: function.
submenu. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
X Press a to confirm. activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
X Press the 9 or : button to select displayed in red in the multifunction
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. display.
You will see the selected setting: On or
Off. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
X Press the a button to save the setting. feature (Y page 114).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off

Convenience submenu.
Belt Adjustment function.
When the Belt Adjustment function is
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed
in red in the multifunction display. : To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
For further information on belt adjustment,
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior
see (Y page 56).
mirrors will not fold out automatically
Switching the fold-in mirrors when (Y page 115).
locking feature on/off You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
This function is only available on vehicles with using button :.
the memory function (Y page 117).
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Restoring the factory settings
Folding function, the exterior mirrors are X Press the = or ; button on the
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the
exterior mirrors fold out again.
Factory Setting submenu.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
Convenience submenu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
Mirror Folding function.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
display shows a confirmation message.
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
displayed in red in the multifunction For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
display. Lights function in the Lights submenu is
X Press the a button to save the setting. only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Z
228 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 189)
RParking (Y page 167)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 229
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and
Currently hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ä, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
can increase.
Z


X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ä and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
÷ to a malfunction.
Inoperative See BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
can increase.

F(USA You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake.
only)
Please Release
Parking Brake
$(USA A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or

DISTRONIC PLUS is active.
only)J(Canada A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock
only) the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
Brake Immediately You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message
disappears.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
You can restart the engine.
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are

malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
Z

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

Functions Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Currently Limited Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
See Operator's
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Manual
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 304).
X Restart the engine.
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS

Functions Limited or the distance warning signal may also have failed.
See Operator's X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
A G Risk of injury
Malfunction Cabriolet: the roll bars are defective.
Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
SRS Malfunction cluster.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 39).
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left
Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
or Front Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Malfunction be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 G WARNING
Rear Left The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
Malfunction triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Service Required be triggered.
or Rear Right There is an increased risk of injury.
Malfunction SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
Service Required warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet).
Left Side Curtain The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side The left or right window curtain air bag (Coupe) or headbag
Curtain Airbag (Cabriolet) may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event
Malfunction of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
Manual system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat.
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional

weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and
the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When
the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System)
has deactivated the front-passenger air bag (Y page 46).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit
or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 46).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Ran adult
Manual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat.
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console and
the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When
the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 46).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
Z

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be

occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit
or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 46).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Check Left
(Y page 130).
Cornering Light or
Check Right or
Cornering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
(Y page 130).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Rear Left
(Y page 130).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 130).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
Check Left Mirror X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Turn Signal or
(Y page 130).
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal or
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
(Y page 130).
Lamp
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 130).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 130).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

Check Left License
(Y page 130).
Plate Lamp or
Check Right or
License Plate Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.

Check Left Fog
(Y page 130).
Lamp or Check
Right Fog Lamp or
Z

b The rear fog lamp is defective.

Rear Fog Lamp
(Y page 130).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 130).
Parking Lamp or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.

Check Left Reverse
(Y page 130).
Lamp or Check
Right Reverse Lamp or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 129).
Sidemarker Lamp or
Sidemarker Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 129).
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right or
Sidemarker Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
(Y page 130).
Running Light or
Check Right or
Daytime Running X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative

b The exterior lighting is defective.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Z
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 296).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 295).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 296).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
Z

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 189).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 189).
Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated.

Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 226).
Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
or Active Lane
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Keeping Assist
Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
Operator's Manual message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative or
Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe sensors are dirty.
Operator's Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
or Active Blind
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Spot Assist
Currently range.
Unavailable See Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 304).
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
Active Blind Spot mirrors.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 194).

Inoperative X Restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:
Canceled Rthe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Ra malfunction has occurred.

X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 194).
If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction

display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):
X Clean the sensors (Y page 304).
If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the

multifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages
in the multifunction display.
Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 177).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

Currently Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Unavailable See Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.

message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 304).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be
inoperative as well.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Passive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 174).
Z
Tires

Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Tire Pressure loss in pressure.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 308).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 329).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 329).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressures The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.
will be displayed X Drive on.
after driving a The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
few minutes have been driving for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tire Press. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
following hazards:
increase.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 330).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
RYou could lose control of the vehicle.
RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Z

Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 330).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 332).
TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
h The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.

Tire Press.
Warning Tire G WARNING
Malfunction If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
RYou could lose control of the vehicle.
RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.

h The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tire Press. Check G WARNING

Tire Pressure With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
increase.
h The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Correct Tire X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 330).
Pressure
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
P You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop button
Shift to 'P' while the transmission was not in position P.
Z

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:

Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the hood
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock

the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
You can restart the engine.
Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or

right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
Rear Left Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Not Latched or
Rear Right
Backrest Not
Latched

_ The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A
warning tone also sounds.
Lock Seat Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Front Left or Lock
Seat Backrest
Front Right
J Cabriolet: the trunk partition is open.

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 96).
Trunk Partition
Open
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering
Malfunction See G WARNING
Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
K If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot
open or close the soft top.
Convertible Top X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 90).
Operation Possible
to 25 mph
K The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are
depressurized.
Convertible Top X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 90).
Opening/Closing
Not Finished
Z

K The roof is not locked.

If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot
Open/Close open or close the soft top.
Convertible Top
Completely
X Push or pull the soft-top switch until the soft top is fully open or
closed (Y page 90).
K The on-board voltage is too low.

X Start the engine.
Start Engine See
Operator's Manual The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.
The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safety
reasons.
You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 90).
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 297).
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 75).
Replace Key Battery

Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display
message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Vehicle
Z
256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Â The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A
Remove 'Start' warning tone also sounds.
Button and Insert
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
Key
desired position.
Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps
overview
L Low-beam headlamps
(Y page 122)
T Parking lamps (Y page 123)
K High-beam headlamps
(Y page 124)
#! Turn signals (Y page 124)
ü Seat belts (Y page 257)
$ (USA) Brakes (Y page 258)
J (Canada) Brakes (Y page 258)
! ABS (Y page 258)
ä ESP®(Y page 259)
å ESP® OFF (Y page 259)
6 SRS (Y page 261)
; Check Engine (Y page 262)
8 Reserve fuel (Y page 262)
? Coolant (Y page 262)
· Distance warning signal
(Y page 264)
h Tire pressure monitor
(Y page 265)
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257
Safety

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).
warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You
The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven
warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).
audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
sounds. ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving

faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than
15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
! ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
The yellow ABS warning BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability
lamp is lit while the Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and
engine is running. hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.
G WARNING
can increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
lamp is lit while the function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.
engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
warning tone also
sounds. G WARNING
can increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
äå! function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamp, the yellow ESP® G WARNING
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
can increase.
display.
Z

ä ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
motion. necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 66).

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 66).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
äå ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD

The yellow ESP® and function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps are lit while the
G WARNING
engine is running.
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
display.

$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake applied.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake system The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

The red SRS warning System).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 39).
Z
Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
Check Engine warning workshop.
lamp may light up.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.

? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
warning lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
while the engine is malfunctioning.
running. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 296).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is G WARNING
running. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
display.
Z

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 296).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
Driving systems

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance of travel at too high a speed.
warning lamp lights up X Be prepared to brake immediately.
while the vehicle is in X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
motion. A warning tone brake or take evasive action.
also sounds.
Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177).
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67).
Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
USA only: least one of the tires.
The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/
following hazards:
malfunction) is lit.
Canada only:
increase.
The yellow tire pressure
(pressure loss) is lit. impair tire traction.
display.
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

USA only: G WARNING
The yellow tire pressure
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
pressure.
(pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes for There is a risk of an accident.
approximately one X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
minute and then display.
remains lit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
266
267

Stowage areas .................................. 268
Features ............................................. 273
Stowage and features

268 Stowage areas
Useful information or the gross axle weight rating of the

vehicle (including occupants). The values
i This Operator's Manual describes all are specified on the vehicle identification
models and all standard and optional plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as
time of publication of the Operator's possible and as low down in the trunk as
Manual. Country-specific differences are possible.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
not be equipped with all features edge of the seat backrests.
described. This also applies to safety- Ralways place the load against the rear or
related systems and functions. front seat backrests. Make sure that the
i Read the information on qualified seat backrests are securely locked into
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). place.
Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Stowage areas Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
Loading guidelines
for protection.
G WARNING
Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and Stowage space
fastening materials appropriate for the weight Important safety notes
and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden G WARNING
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around To help avoid personal injury during a collision
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
vehicle occupants unless the items are storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
securely fastened in the vehicle. cargo in the trunk if possible.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when seat backrests.
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
cargo higher than the seat backrests. to prevent stored objects from being thrown
The trunk is the preferred place to carry about and injuring vehicle occupants during
objects. Rbraking
Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open. Rvehicle maneuvers
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Ran accident
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Stowage areas 269
Glove box Stowage compartment under the

armrest

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;. X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards hand button :.
until it engages. The stowage compartment opens.
i The glove box can be ventilated i A small and a large stowage compartment
(Y page 146). are located under the armrest. The small
stowage compartment can be removed for
emptying.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
(see the separate COMAND Operating
Instructions).
The glove box can only be locked and

unlocked using the mechanical key. Stowage nets
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
G WARNING
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
2.
weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into etc.
the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
to position 1. fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
in the event of an accident.
Z
270 Stowage areas
Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk backrests can be folded down separately to
(Coupe) or left and right-hand sides of the increase the trunk capacity.
trunk (Cabriolet).
Folding the seat backrest forward
Through-loading facility in the rear

compartment
G WARNING
Do not transport any unsecured items in the

through-loading area.
i Vehicles with memory function: when you

fold one or both parts of the rear seat
backrest forwards, the respective front
seat moves forward slightly, when
necessary, in order to avoid contact.
X Vehicles without memory function: if
necessary, move the driver's or front-
X Fold down rear seat armrest =. passenger seat forwards.
X Pull handle : and fold cover ; X Open the trunk.
downwards. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat
backrest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
Through-loading facility in the rear released.
bench seat (Coupe)
G WARNING
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fold the seat backrests fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
vehicle occupants unless the items are X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
securely fastened in the vehicle. back if necessary.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
Stowage areas 271
Folding the seat backrest back Securing cargo

G WARNING Cargo tie-down rings
Always lock the seat backrest in its upright
position when the rear seat bench is General notes
occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not Observe the following notes on securing
in use. loads:
Check for secure locking by pushing and Rsecure the load using the cargo tie-down
pulling on the seat backrest. rings.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around a load, as these are only intended as an
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to anti-slip protection for light loads.
vehicle occupants unless the items are Rdo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
securely fastened in the vehicle. or corners.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision Rpad sharp edges for protection.
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo. Trunk
! Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
Example: Coupe
There are four cargo tie down rings in the
trunk on the Coupe and two cargo tie down
rings in the trunk sill on the Cabriolet.
X Coupe: fold up cargo tie down rings : next
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
to the rear seat backrest and push them
forward if necessary.
through the slits in the carpet.
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
Bag hook
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
i You should always engage the rear seat secure a load.
backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent
unauthorized access to the trunk from the
vehicle interior.
Z
272 Stowage areas
X Coupe: hook handle : into rain

trough ;.
X Cabriolet: pull the trunk floor slightly
towards you and then hook handle : into
rain trough ;.
Roof carrier (Coupe)


: Bag hook
G WARNING
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage
Stowage well under the trunk floor
to the vehicle.
! Unhook the handle before again before Follow the manufacturer's installation
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
to prevent the handle flap from protruding. attached roof rack system or its load could
Otherwise, you could damage the handle. become detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicle without the roof rack loaded.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are vehicle.
located in the stowage compartment. Position the load on the roof rack in such a
X To open: pull handle : up. way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof carrier is
installed you can:
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel fully
Ropen the trunk lid fully
! To avoid damaging or scratching the

covers, do not use metallic or hard objects
to open them.
Example: Coupe
Features 273
Attaching the roof carrier contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you

or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
Vehicles with a steel roof holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X Fold covers : upwards.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the
anchorage points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions. : Cup holders
Features
Cup holders
G WARNING
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
Z
274 Features
Cup holder in the rear stowage box

Example: Coupe
: Mirror light
Coupe (double cup holder, side by side)
; Bracket
X To open (Coupe): slide cover : forwards.
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor

is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side

Cabriolet (double cup holder, in line)
X Fold down the sun visor.
X To open (Cabriolet): slide front cup holder
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
cover ; and rear cup holder cover : in
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
the direction of the arrows.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Reflected glare can endanger you and others.
X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of
the arrow.
Features 275
Rear window roller sunblind (Coupe)

G WARNING
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child

restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
access to a vehicle could result in an accident ignition lock (Y page 151).
and/or serious personal injury. The children X To extend or retract: briefly press
could:
button :.
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through retracts.
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
vehicle equipment that can be operated Ashtray
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, Front ashtray
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel ! The stowage space under the ashtray is
adjustment, or the memory function not heat resistant. Before placing lit
If children open a door, they could injure other cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
themselves or be injured by following traffic. the stowage space could be damaged.
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
G WARNING
When adjusting a roller sunblind, the roller
blind moves up or down. You might become
trapped in the process.
In the event of danger, briefly press the button X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
for the roller sunblind to change the roller
engages.
blind's direction of movement.
X To remove the insert: grasp insert = by
the notch at the side and lift it up ; and
Extending/retracting the roller
sunblind out.
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can

move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
Z
276 Features
X To re-install the insert: press insert = Cigarette lighter

into the holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
G WARNING
front. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
The cover moves back. SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and Do not leave children unattended in the
use the resulting compartment for vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
stowage. restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised

Rear-compartment ashtray access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
vehicle equipment that can be operated
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. If children open a door, they could injure other
X To remove the insert: press release persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
button = and lift the insert up and out. themselves or be injured by following traffic.
X To install the insert: install insert : from Do not expose the child restraint system to
above into the holder and press down into direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
the holder until it engages. metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
G WARNING
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
Features 277
Socket in the front-compartment center

console

ignition lock (Y page 151).
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages. engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
front.
red-hot.
The cover moves back.
front.
Socket in the rear-compartment center
The cover moves back.
console
12 V sockets
General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Accessories include such items as lamps or
chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
the engine is switched off, the battery may X Lift up the cover of socket :.
discharge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If mbrace
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This Important safety notes
ensures that there is sufficient power to ! A license agreement must exist in order
start the engine. to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that
your system is activated and ready for use,
and press the ï MB Info call button to
register. If any of the steps mentioned is
Z
278 Features
not carried out, the system may not be The mbrace system provides various
activated. services, e.g.:
If you have questions about the activation, Rautomatic and manual emergency call
contact one of the following telephone RRoadside Assistance call
assistance services: RMB Info call
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer USA only: you can find information and a
Assistance Center under description of all available features under
1-800-FOR-MERCedes "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at

System self-test
1-888-923-8367
After you have switched on the ignition, the
Shortly after successfully registering with the system carries out a self-diagnosis.
mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID
and password will be sent to you by post. USA A malfunction in the system has been
only: you can use this password to log onto detected if one of the following conditions
the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at occurs:
http://www.mbusa.com. Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
The mbrace system is available if: not come on during the system self-test.
Rthe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Rit has been activated and is operational
Assistance button does not light up during
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
self-diagnosis of the system.
is available for transmitting data to the
Rthe indicator lamp in the ï MB-Info call
Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available
button does not light up during self-
diagnosis of the system.
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe indicator lamp in one or more of the
i Determining the location of the vehicle on following buttons continues to light up red
a map is only possible if: after the system self-diagnosis:
RGPS reception is available - SOS button
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to - Roadside Assistance call button F
the Customer Assistance Center - MB Info call button ï

RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace
The mbrace system Service Not Activated message
To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, appears in the multifunction display after
proceed as follows: the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
X Press the W or X button on the
above, the system may not operate as
multifunction steering wheel. expected. In the event of an emergency,
or assistance must be summoned by other
X Use the volume controller of the audio means.
system/COMAND. Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
center at
Features 279
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) As soon as the emergency call has been

or 1-888-990-9007 initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
RCanada: Customer Service at flashes. The Connecting Call message
1-888-923-8367 appears on the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Emergency call Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
Important safety notes multifunction display.
G WARNING All important information on the emergency

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is is transmitted, for example:
flashing continuously and no voice Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as
connection with the Response center has determined by the GPS system)
been established, then the mbrace system Rvehicle identification number
has not been able to initiate an emergency call
Rinformation on serious accidents
(e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is not
available). Shortly after the emergency call has been
The Call Failed message is displayed in the initiated, a voice connection is automatically
multifunction display and must be confirmed. established between the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle
Should this occur, assistance must be
occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,
summoned by other means.
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
! A license agreement must exist in order Center attempts to get more information on
to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that the emergency.
your system is activated and ready for use, i If there is no response from the vehicle
and press the ï MB Info call button to occupants, an ambulance is immediately
register. If any of the steps mentioned is sent to the vehicle.
not carried out, the system may not be
activated. Making an emergency call
If you have questions about the activation, G WARNING
contact one of the following telephone If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
assistance services: vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
Assistance Center under do not wait for voice contact after you have
1-800-FOR-MERCedes pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 vehicle and move to a safe location. The
RCanada: Customer Service at
Response Center will automatically contact
local emergency officials with the vehicle's
1-888-923-8367
approximate location if they receive an
An emergency call is dialed automatically if automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is contact with the vehicle occupants.
triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
Z
280 Features
If a cellular phone network is available and

there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center, for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
i The COMAND display shows that an
mbrace call is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by

pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for
X To initiate an emergency call example.
manually: press cover : briefly to open. Voice output is not available.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
A voice connection is established between
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
flashes until the emergency call is Center and the vehicle occupants.
concluded. From the vehicle remote malfunction
X Wait for a voice connection to the diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Assistance center can ascertain the nature of
Center. the problem (Y page 284).
X After the emergency call, close cover :. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or organizes for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing. Further details are available in your
mbrace manual.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
X Press Roadside Assistance button :.
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz established
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in Roadside Assistance button : This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears on The Call Failed message appears in the
the multifunction display. The audio output multifunction display.
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
Features 281
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the obtain information on how to operate your
multifunction steering wheel. vehicle's systems, on the location of the
or nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
X
and on further products and services offered
Press the corresponding button for ending
by Mercedes-Benz USA.
a phone call on COMAND.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
MB Info call button
http://www.mbusa.com.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate an

MB Info call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
X
The Call Failed message appears in the
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while multifunction steering wheel.
the connection is being made. The or
Connecting Call message appears on X Press the corresponding button for ending
the multifunction display. The audio system a phone call on COMAND.
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Call priority
Connected message appears in the
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
If a cellular phone network is available and call can still be initiated. In this case, an
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace emergency call will take priority and override
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz all other active calls.
Customer Assistance Center, for example:
The indicator lamp of the respective button
Rcurrent location of the vehicle flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
Rvehicle identification number call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
i The COMAND display shows that an
mbrace call is active. During the call, you All other calls can be ended by pressing:
can change to the navigation menu by Rthe ~ button on the multifunction
pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for steering wheel
example. Ror the corresponding COMAND button for
Voice output is not available. ending a telephone call
A voice connection is established between i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
Center and the vehicle occupants. You can connected to COMAND. However, if you
Z
282 Features
want to use your mobile phone, do so only current position and the desired destination.
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe You will then be guided live through the
location. current route section.
Downloading destinations in COMAND Search & Send

Downloading destinations General notes
Downloading destinations gives you access i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle
to a data bank with over 15 million Points of must be equipped with mbrace and a
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on navigation system. You must also have an
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you mbrace service subscription.
know the destination, the address can be "Search & Send" is a destination entry
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the service. A destination address which is found
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
on Google Maps® can be transferred via
important destinations in the vicinity.
mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation
Furthermore, you can download routes with system.
up to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance Specifying and sending the destination
to the address entered. address
The system calculates the route and X Go to the website http://
subsequently starts the route guidance with www.maps.google.com and enter a

the address entered. destination address into the entry field.
X To send the destination address to the
i If you select No, the address can be stored
e-mail address of your mbrace
in the address book.
account: click on the corresponding
i The Destination Download function is button.
available if the corresponding mobile i Example:
phone network is available and data If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
transfer is possible. 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
i You can only use the Destination will be sent to your vehicle.
Download function if the vehicle is X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
equipped with a navigation system. In the relevant field, enter the e-mail
Route Assistance address which you specified when
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS activating your mbrace account.
Package and cannot be purchased X Click "Send".
separately. i Information on specific commands such

i You can also use the Route Assistance as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be
function if your vehicle is not equipped with found on the website.
a navigation system.
Calling up destination addresses
Within the framework of this service, you X Switch on the ignition.
receive a professional and reliable form of The destination address is loaded into the
navigation support without having to leave vehicle's navigation system.
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
Features 283
A display message appears, asking (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

whether navigation should be started. RCanada: Customer Service at
X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning 1-888-923-8367
cVd the COMAND controller and press You will be asked for your password.
W to confirm. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
The system calculates the route and upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
subsequently starts the route guidance Assistance Center.
with the address entered. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:

i If you select No, the address can be stored
in the address book. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
i If you have sent more than one section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
destination address, each individual
destination must be confirmed separately. Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
i Destination addresses are loaded in the
number and password.
same order as the order in which they were
sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace the corresponding mobile phone network
accounts: is accessible.
if multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will Vehicle remote closing
be sent to all the vehicles. The remote closing feature can be used when
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
Vehicle remote opening are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and Assistance center.
a replacement SmartKey is not available. The The vehicle can be immediately remotely
vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz locked within four days of the ignition being
Customer Assistance center. turned off. After this time, the remote closing
The vehicle can be immediately remotely may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
opened within four days of the ignition being 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
turned off. After this time, the remote opening remotely.
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After X Contact the following service hotlines:
30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
remotely. Assistance center at
X Contact the following service hotlines: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007
Assistance center at RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes 1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your PIN.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Locked Remotely message appears in the
Z
284 Features
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-
locked via: Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" called.
section If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Blackberry)
center. You will see the Roadside
To do this, you will need your identification Assistance Connected message in the
number and password. COMAND display. If the vehicle remote
i The vehicle remote closing feature is malfunction diagnosis is able to be started,

available when the relevant mobile phone the Request for vehicle diagnosis
network is available and data connection is received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
possible. message appears in the display.
X Press Yes to confirm the message.
Stolen vehicle recovery service X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please
If your vehicle has been stolen: switch on ignition. message appears:

turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
X Notify the police.
lock.
The police will issue a numbered incident
X If the Please follow the
report.
instructions received by phone and
X This number will be forwarded to the
move your vehicle to a safe
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
position. message appears: follow the
Center together with your PIN.
instructions of the customer service
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
representative.
Center then attempts to locate the mbrace
The message in the display disappears.
system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center contacts you and the If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
local law enforcement agency if the vehicle malfunction diagnosis is canceled
is located. However, only the law completely.
enforcement agency is informed of the The vehicle operating state check begins.
location of the vehicle. Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis
activated message appears.
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- When the check is finished, the Sending
Benz Customer Assistance center is vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice
automatically informed. connection may be interrupted
during data transfer.) message
appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
the Customer Assistance center.
With the vehicle remote malfunction X Press OK to confirm the message.
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the The voice connection with the Customer
Customer Assistance center can provide Assistance center is terminated.
improved support for problems with your
The Vehicle Diagnosis:
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data
Transferring data... appears.
is transferred to the Customer Assistance
center. The customer service representative The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
can use the received data to decide what kind Assistance center.
of assistance is required. You are then, for
Features 285
Depending on what the customer service XTo start route guidance: select Yes.
representative agreed with you, the voice An overview of the route is shown in the
connection is re-established after the transfer display.
is complete. If necessary, you will be i If you select No, the saved route can be
contacted at a later time by another means, called up later in the navigation menu.
e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.
X Select Start.
Further functions of the vehicle remote
Route guidance is started.
malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer i Downloaded and saved data can be called

Assistance center. If a service is overdue, up again in COMAND. Further information
the COMAND display shows a message can be found in the "COMAND", "Online
about various special offers at your and Internet services" and "Download
workshop. destination/route" sections.
Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, Speed alert
etc. If applicable, you will receive You can define the upper speed limit, which
information on special offers in the E-Mail. must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this
USA only: this information can also be selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a
called up under "Owners Online" at http:// message will be sent to the Customer
www.mbusa.com. Assistance center. The Customer Assistance
Information on the data stored in the vehicle center then forwards this information to you.
(Y page 25). You can select the way in which you receive
Information on roadside assistance this information beforehand. Possible options
(Y page 22). include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
The data which is sent to the Customer
Downloading routes Assistance center contains the following
information:
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
Rthe location where the speed limit was
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system. To do this, an SD memory card must exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert exceeded
the card into the card slot on the COMAND Rthe selected speed limit which was
system before saving. exceeded
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the Geo fencing
mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
include up to 20 way points. When a route has the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
been received by the navigation system, be informed if the vehicle crosses the
'Route name' has been saved to boundaries of the selected areas. You can
memory card. Do you want to start select the way in which you receive this
route guidance? appears on the COMAND information beforehand. Possible options
display. The route is saved to the SD memory include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
card.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas
Z
286 Features
simultaneously. Different settings are Do not run the engine while programming the
possible for each area. integrated remote control. Inhalation of
USA only: these settings can be called up exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
under "Owners Online" at http:// exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
www.mbusa.com. and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and possible death. All exhaust gas contains
and inform the customer service carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
representative that you wish to activate geo cause unconsciousness and possible death.
fencing.
The HomeLink® garage door opener

Currently inactive areas can be activated by
integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
SMS.
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
i Certain garage door drives are
With this function, you can trigger the incompatible with the integrated garage
vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm door opener. If you have difficulty
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. programming the integrated garage door
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the Benz Center.
alarm switches off.
Alternatively, you can call the following
telephone assistance services:
Garage door opener RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
Important safety notes 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
G WARNING RCanada: Customer Service at
Before programming the integrated remote 1-800-387-0100

control to a garage door opener or gate RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
operator, make sure people and objects are (free of charge)

out of the way of the device to prevent More information on HomeLink® and/or
potential harm or damage. When compatible products is also available
programming a garage door opener, the door online at http://www.homelink.com.
moves up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes. i USA only:
Do not use the integrated remote control with This device complies with part 15 of the
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
and reverse features as required by U.S. following two conditions:
federal safety standards (this includes any 1. This device may not cause harmful
garage door opener model manufactured interference, and
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that 2. this device must accept any interference
cannot detect an object - signaling the door received, including interference that may
to stop and reverse - does not meet current cause undesired operation.
U.S. federal safety standards. Any unauthorized modification to this
When programming a garage door opener, device could void the user's authority to
park vehicle outside the garage. operate the equipment.
FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Features 287
i Canada only: XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on

This device complies with the RSS-210 the integrated garage door opener.
Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
subject to the following two conditions: up yellow.
1. This device may not cause harmful i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
interference, and as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
2. this device must accept any interference the first time. If the selected button has
received, including interference that may already been programmed, indicator
cause undesired operation of the device. lamp : will only light up yellow after ten

Any unauthorized modification to this seconds have elapsed.
device could void the user's authority to X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
operate the equipment. lamp : flashes yellow.
IC: 279B-HMIHL4 X Point garage door remote control A
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
Programming
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to
Programming buttons 20 cm).
i The required distance between remote
G WARNING
control A and the integrated garage door
Only press the button on the integrated
opener depends on the garage door drive
garage door opener if there are no persons or
system. Several attempts might be
objects present within the sweep of the
necessary. You should test every position
garage door. Persons could otherwise be
for at least 25 seconds before trying
injured as the door moves.
another position.
X Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been
successful.
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the
corresponding button on the rear-view
Integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
mirror between remote control A and the rear-
Garage door remote control A is not part of view mirror.
the integrated garage door opener.
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
X Before programming for the first time, clear
successful programming, the garage door
the memory of the integrated garage door system is using a rolling code. After
opener (Y page 289). programming, you must synchronize the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the garage door opener integrated in the rear-
ignition lock. view mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.
Z
288 Features
Synchronizing the rolling code X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on

Your vehicle must be within reach of the the integrated garage door opener.
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ up yellow.
objects are present within the sweep of the X Release the button.
door or gate. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
Observe the safety notes when performing X Press button B of garage door remote
the rolling code synchronization. control A for two seconds, then release it
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the for two seconds.
ignition lock. X Press button B again for two seconds.

X Press the programming button of the door
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
or gate drive (see the door or gate drive
remote control A until indicator lamp :
operating instructions, e.g. under
"Programming of additional remote lights up green.
controls"). If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
process.
i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
X Continue with the other programming
initiate the next step.
steps (see above).
X Press previously programmed button ;,
= or ? of the integrated garage door Problems when programming
opener until the door closes. If you are experiencing problems
The rolling code synchronization is then programming the integrated garage door
complete. opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
the following instructions:
Notes on programming the remote
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
control
door drive remote control A. This can
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
usually be found on the back of the remote
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
control.
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long The integrated garage door opener is
enough for the integrated garage door compatible with devices that have units
opener. The signal is not recognized during which operate in the frequency range of
programming. Comparable with Canadian 280to 433MHz.
law, some U.S. garage door openers are RReplace the batteries in garage door
designed to "time-out" in the same manner. remote control A. This increases the
Proceed as follows: likelihood that garage door remote control
Rif
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
you live in Canada
to the integrated garage door opener in the
Rif you have difficulties programming the rear-view mirror.
garage door opener (regardless of where
RWhen programming, hold remote control
you live) when using the programming
A at varying distances and angles from the
steps
button that you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
Features 289
same programming steps with this remote i Make sure that you clear the memory of
control. Before performing these steps, the integrated garage door opener before
make sure that new batteries have been selling the vehicle.
installed in garage door drive remote
control A.
RNote that some remote controls only Compass
transmit for a limited amount of time (the Calling up the compass
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
out). Press button B on remote control

A again before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal
reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions To receive a correct display in rear-view
for the garage door system. mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the and the magnetic field zone set.
ignition lock. X Briefly press button =.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have Compass ; displays in which compass
programmed to operate the garage door. direction the vehicle is currently traveling:
Garage door system with a fixed code: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The
transmission is halted after a maximum of
ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
if necessary.
Clearing the memory

ignition lock.
X Press buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
Z
290 Features
Setting the compass Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-
voltage transmission lines.

Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold button =(Y page 289) for
approximately six seconds until the
North America zone map
C symbol appears in compass display ;
(Y page 289).
X Drive in a full circle at approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 289).
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
South America zone map fastened using the fastening equipment.
X Set your location using the zone maps. Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A
X Press and hold button =(Y page 289) for loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
approximately three seconds. functioning of the pedals.
The zone currently selected appears in Do not place several floormats on top of each
compass display ;(Y page 289). other as this may impair pedal movement.
X To select the zone: press
button =(Y page 289) repeatedly until the
desired zone is selected.
The zone has been selected when compass
display ;(Y page 289) shows the heading.
This takes a few seconds.
Features 291

X Slide the seat backwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Z
292
293

Engine compartment ........................ 294
Maintenance ...................................... 298
Care .................................................... 299
Maintenance and care

294 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

To avoid injury, stay clear of moving parts
i This Operator's Manual describes all when the hood is open and the engine is
models and all standard and optional running.
equipment of your vehicle available at the The radiator fan may continue to run for
time of publication of the Operator's approximately 30seconds or may even restart
Manual. Country-specific differences are after the engine has been switched off. For
possible. Please note that your vehicle may this reason, you must not reach into the fan
not be equipped with all features rotation area.
related systems and functions. G WARNING
i Read the information on qualified The engine is equipped with a transistorized

specialist workshops: (Y page 24). ignition system. Because of the high voltage,
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
Engine compartment socket) of the ignition system:
Rwith the engine running
Hood
Rwhile starting the engine
Opening the hood Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
G WARNING engine is turned manually

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be G WARNING
forced open by passing air flow. The windshield wipers and wiper linkage
could be set in motion.
This could cause the hood to come loose and
injure you and/or others. When the hood is open, you or others could
be injured by the wiper linkage.
G WARNING Make sure that the windshield wipers are
Do not open the hood when the engine is switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make
overheated. You could be seriously injured. sure that no ignition position has been
Observe the coolant temperature gauge to selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator
determine whether the engine may be lamps must be off in the instrument panel.
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine not folded away from the windshield. You
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire could otherwise damage the windshield
department. wipers or the hood.
G WARNING
There is a risk of injury if the hood is open,
even if the engine is not running.
Some engine components can become very
hot.
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Operator's
Manual and observe the relevant safety notes.
Engine compartment 295
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height

of approximately 8 inches (20cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off. Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
The hood is released. oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
handle ; up and lift the hood. started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
If you lift the hood approximately before carrying out the measurement.
15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened and
held open automatically by the gas-filled Checking the oil level using the oil
struts. dipstick
Closing the hood

G WARNING
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others.
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
Z
296 Engine compartment
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
Adding engine oil

G WARNING Example: engine oil cap
If engine oil comes into contact with hot X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn it.
yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot X Add engine oil.
engine parts. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
H Environmental note of engine oil.
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful clockwise.
to the environment. Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
X Check the oil level again with the oil
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the dipstick (Y page 295).
engine oils and oil filters tested and Further information on engine oil
approved in accordance with the (Y page 365).
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center. Additional service products
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following: Checking the coolant level
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have G WARNING
not been specifically approved for the In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
service system Ruse extreme caution when opening the
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
hood if there are any signs of steam or
the interval for replacement specified by coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
the service system has been exceeded if the coolant temperature display indicates
Rusing engine oil additives. that the coolant is overheated.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the
engine oil can result in damage to the coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have is above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine to
excess engine oil siphoned off. cool down before removing the cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is
under pressure.
Engine compartment 297
Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap neck when warm, there is enough coolant
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess in coolant expansion tank ;.
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding X If necessary, add coolant that has been
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
pressure. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. as it will go.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
For further information on coolant, see
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
(Y page 366).
engine parts.
Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system/headlamp cleaning

system
G WARNING
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the
vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 151).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
158 ‡ (70 †). X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Turn the SmartKey to position
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
0 (Y page 151) in the ignition lock.
until it engages.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise to allow excess pressure to The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
escape. windshield washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
Further information on windshield washer
remove it.
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 367).
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
Z
298 Maintenance
Maintenance Hiding a service message

X Press the % or a button on the
ASSYST PLUS
steering wheel.
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Displaying service messages
informs you of the next service due date. X Switch on the ignition.
Information on the type of service and service X Press the = or ; button on the
intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
You can obtain further information from an X Press the 9 or : button to select the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

a.
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display The service due date appears in the
does not show any information on the multifunction display.
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 295). Information about Service
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.: Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
Next Service A in .. days interval display
Service A Due ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
Service A Exceeded by ... days
setting can be corrected at a qualified
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with specialist workshop.
a number or another letter, shows the type of
Have service work carried out as described
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
a major service.
otherwise lead to increased wear and
You can obtain further information from an damage to the major assemblies or the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
does not take into account any periods of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
time during which the battery is
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
disconnected.
after the service work has been carried out.
Maintaining the time-dependent service You can also obtain further information on
schedule: maintenance work, for example.
X Note down the service due date displayed
Special service requirements
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery. Arduous operating conditions or increased
loads on the vehicle will require some service
or
work to be performed more often than for a
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract vehicle in normal use. Such arduous
the battery disconnection periods from the conditions include regular city driving with
service date shown on the display. frequent intermediate stops and use in
mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces.
For example, if the vehicle is used under
arduous operating conditions, have air filters,
Care 299
engine oil and oil filters changed frequently ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
and check the wheels often. Further period straight after cleaning it, particularly
information can be obtained at a qualified after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Mercedes-Benz Center. increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Driving abroad should drive for a few minutes after
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
is also available in other countries. You can the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
obtain further information from any The vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for

retaining the quality in the long term.
Care Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
General notes Benz.
G WARNING
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. paintwork
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your Automatic car wash
vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the
inside. G WARNING
Never use fluids or solvents that are not Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
designed for cleaning your vehicle. the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For
this reason, you must drive particularly
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
carefully after washing the vehicle until the
them out of reach of children.
brakes have dried.
G WARNING
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
cloths in an environmentally responsible
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
manner.
deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an
of the following: automatic car wash.
Rdry, rough or hard cloths ! Preferably use automatic car washes with
Rabrasive cleaning agents adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This
Rsolvents corresponds with the specification for the
Rcleaning agents containing solvents Cabriolet program. In car washes that use
high water pressures, there is a risk that a
Do not scrub. small amount of water may leak into the
Do not touch the surfaces or protective vehicle.
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or ! Cabriolet: do not treat the vehicle with
damage the surfaces and protective film. hot wax under any circumstances.
! Cabriolet: pull the SmartKey out of the
ignition lock when washing the vehicle. This
Z
300 Care
ensures that the wind deflector on the X Do not point the water jet directly towards
windshield is retracted. The wind deflector the air inlet.
may otherwise be damaged. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless sponge frequently.

Automatic Car Wash as these use special X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can thoroughly with a chamois.
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
! Make sure that: paintwork.

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
or soft top are fully closed. traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
Power washers
0. G WARNING
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. Do not use power washers with circular-jet
! Make sure that the automatic nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in
transmission is in position N when washing particular the tires. You could otherwise
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The damage the tires and cause an accident.
vehicle could be damaged if the
! Always maintain a distance of at least
transmission is in another position.
11.8in (30cm) between the vehicle and the
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car power washer nozzle. Information about
wash from the very start. the correct distance is available from the
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before equipment manufacturer.
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. Move the power washer nozzle around
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off when cleaning your vehicle.
wax from the windshield and the wiper Do not aim directly at any of the following:
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce Rtires
wiping noises caused by residue on the
Rdoor gaps, joints etc.
windshield.
Rsoft top (Cabriolet)
Washing by hand Rwind deflector net (Cabriolet)
Relectrical components
In some countries, washing by hand is only
Rbattery
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all Rconnectors
countries concerned. Rlights
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rseals
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rtrim elements
X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rventilation slots
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Damaged seals or electrical components
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. can lead to leaks or failures.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
Care 301
Cleaning the paintwork Matte finish care

! Do not affix: ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
Rstickers wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
Rfilms
shine.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items ! The following may cause the paint to
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise become shiny and thus reduce the matte
damage the paintwork. effect:
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by materials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
inadequate care cannot always be completely

repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
specialist workshop. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
while avoiding rubbing too hard. wax. These products are only suitable for
X Soak insect remains with insect remover high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. with matte finish leads to considerable
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
off the treated areas afterwards. Always have paintwork repairs performed
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
lighter fluid. treatment under any circumstances.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
surface, use the paint care products treatment.
recommended and approved by Mercedes- These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
Benz. This is the case approximately every with a clear matte finish.
three to five months, depending on the
climate conditions and the care product used. i The vehicle should preferably be washed
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
and plenty of water.
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes- i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
Benz should be used. from the range of recommended and
Do not use these care products in the sun or approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Z
302 Care
Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning AIRCAP

Cleaning the Cabriolet soft top Cleaning the wind deflector
! Never use any of the following to clean the ! Do not use high-pressure cleaning
soft top: equipment to clean the net.
Rgasoline Clean the wind deflector on the windshield
Rthinner
with the soft top closed.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
Rtar or stain remover
X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the
Rother organic solvents
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
! Remove bird droppings immediately as (Y page 151).
they are corrosive and, therefore, can make X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the
the soft-top fabric leak. Do not use high- Start/Stop button twice (Y page 151).
pressure cleaning equipment to clean the X Open the cover in the lower center console.
vehicle. Do not use sharp-edged equipment
The AIRCAP button is under the cover.
to remove ice and snow.
X Light soiling: you can clean the soft top
while it is dry or rinse it with clear water.
X Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft
top with a brush and clear water. Clean
stains and other dirt with a brush and soft
top cleaning agents that have been
Benz. Always brush from front to back,
following the grain of the fabric.
Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's
X Press AIRCAP button :.
resistance to dirt.
The wind deflector between the windshield
To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the
and the soft top is extended.
soft top using soft top cleaning agents that
have been recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,
can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have
the soft-top seams sealed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
i Cover the soft top appropriately if you
plan to leave the vehicle outside for a long
period of time.
X Clean net ; of the wind deflector with a
soft brush or a moist cloth. For heavier
soiling, clean it with the care and cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Care 303
Mercedes-Benz and rinse it with clean Cleaning the wheels

water.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
Cleaning the AIRCAP wind screen to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
Clean the AIRCAP wind screen with the soft
top open. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the period straight after cleaning it, particularly
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
(Y page 151). cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 151). brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after

X Open the soft top (Y page 90).
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows

G WARNING
Before cleaning the windshield or wiper
blades, switch off the windshield wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
X Press rear seat head restraints button :. indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have
The rear seat head restraints and AIRCAP gone out. The windshield wipers could
wind screen rise upwards. otherwise move and injure you.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
X Clean net ; of the AIRCAP wind screen and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
with a moist cloth together with the care
away. This can lead to corrosion damage
and cleaning agents recommended and
and damage to electronic components.
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Clean the inside and outside of the
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
304 Care
Cleaning the wiper blades cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
G WARNING
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
Before cleaning the windshield or wiper
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
blades, switch off the windshield wipers and
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have
gone out. The windshield wipers could Cleaning the sensors
otherwise move and injure you. ! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,

distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the wiper blade could be damaged.
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and Information about the correct distance is
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the available from the equipment
graphite coating could be damaged. This manufacturer.
could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior Cleaning the rear view camera
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
shampoo or cleaning cloths. around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
Care 305
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that

it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a
commercially available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

When cleaning the steering wheel boss and
camera lens :.
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning
Cleaning the exhaust pipes agents containing solvents cause the surface
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with to become porous, and as a result, plastic
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as parts may break away and be thrown around
wheel cleaner. the interior when an air bag is deployed, which
may result in severe injuries.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may ! Do not affix the following to plastic
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You surfaces:
can restore the original shine of the exhaust Rstickers
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
Rfilms
winter and after washing.
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
product tested and approved by Mercedes- You can otherwise damage the plastic.
Benz. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
Interior care look of the surfaces.
Cleaning the display X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
! For cleaning, do not use any of the X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
following:
products recommended and approved by
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Mercedes-Benz.
Rabrasive cleaning agents The surface may change color temporarily.
Rcommercially-available household Wait until the surface is dry again.
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
not put pressure on the display surface selector lever
when cleaning. This could lead to X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
irreparable damage to the display. leather care agents that have been
Benz.
Z
306 Care
Cleaning genuine wood and trim the seat dry afterwards. Cleaning results
elements depend on the type of dirt and how long
it has been there.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
of damaging the surface. seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
mostly made of anodized aluminum and genuine leather, artificial leather or
can lose their shine if chrome polish is DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead damage the cover.
when cleaning the trim pieces. i Note that regular care is essential to
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very ensure that the appearance and comfort of
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you the covers is retained over time.
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
cloth.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
Mercedes-Benz. cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
Cleaning the seat covers (80 †) or in direct sunlight.
! Observe the following when cleaning: X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure Cleaning the headliner and carpets
that the leather does not become X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
soaked. It may otherwise become rough or dry shampoo.
and cracked. Only use leather care X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
agents that have been tested and cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can approved by Mercedes-Benz.
obtain these from a qualified specialist
workshop.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Let
307

Where will I find...? ........................... 308
Flat tire .............................................. 308
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 310
Jump-starting .................................... 313
Towing and tow-starting .................. 315
Fuses .................................................. 317
Breakdown assistance
308 Flat tire
Useful information Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency

spare wheel
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
i Read the information on qualified
: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
; Vehicle tool kit tray

Where will I find...? = Stowage well
First-aid kit X Open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 272).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RCabriolet: straps for emergency release of
the soft top
RFolding wheel chock
RFuse allocation chart
RJack
RAlignment bolt
ROne pair of gloves
RLug wrench
Example: Coupe, first-aid kit
RTowing eye
X Open the trunk lid.
X Release tensioning strap :.
X Remove first-aid kit ;. Flat tire
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid Preparing the vehicle
kit at least once a year. Replace the Information on changing/mounting a wheel
contents if necessary, and replace missing (Y page 344).
items.
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
Vehicle tool kit Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
General notes
characteristics) (Y page 309)
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 355)
stowage well under the trunk floor.
Flat tire 309
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and Stop driving in emergency mode if:
level ground, as far away as possible from Ryou hear banging noises.
traffic.
Rthevehicle starts to shake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
RESP® is intervening constantly.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
ahead position.
X Shift the transmission to position P. After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
driver's door. characteristics), you can continue to drive
The on-board electronics have status 0, your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
which is the same as the SmartKey having pressure in one or more tires.
been removed. MOExtended tires may only be used in
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock warning system or with an active tire pressure
(Y page 151). monitor.
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. The maximum driving distance is
Make sure that they are not endangered as approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
they do so. vehicle is partially laden, and approximately
X Make sure that no one is near the danger 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
area while a wheel is being changed. laden.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving
wheel change should, for example, stand distance possible depends upon:
behind the barrier. RSpeed
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to RRoad condition
traffic conditions when doing so. ROutside temperature
X Close the driver's door.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat through a moderate style of driving.
properties)
The maximum permissible distance which
G WARNING can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
When driving in emergency mode, the driving the moment the tire pressure loss warning
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when appears in the multifunction display.
cornering, accelerating quickly and when Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
braking. There is a risk of an accident. (80 km/h).
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. i When changing or replacing one or all of
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, the tires, note the label "MOExtended".
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, Take note also of the size specified for the
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.
vehicle.
Z
310 Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) Immediately rinse acid

splashes off with clean
Important safety notes water. Consult a doctor if
Special tools and expert knowledge are necessary.
required when working on the battery, e.g. Wear eye protection.
removal and installing. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Keep children away.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit and
Observe this Operator's
damage your vehicle's electronic system. This
Manual.
can disrupt driving safety systems such as
ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program).
RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock G WARNING
during braking. This limits the steerability Failure to follow these instructions can result
of the vehicle when braking and the braking in severe injury or death.
distance may increase. There is a risk of Never lean over batteries while connecting.
accident. You might get injured.
RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel starts allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
to spin. There is a risk of accident. skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
You should therefore have all work involving flush affected area with water and seek
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist medical help if necessary.
workshop. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
G WARNING flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Comply with safety precautions and take improper connection of jumper cables,
protective measures when handling batteries. smoking etc.
Risk of explosion
G WARNING
Do not place any metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Fire, open flames and
smoking are prohibited Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
when handling the battery. of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Avoid creating sparks. Take care that you do not become statically
Battery acid is caustic. charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
Avoid contact with the skin, rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
eyes or clothing. also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular Never touch the battery first. First, touch the
gloves, an apron and a face outside body of the vehicle in order to release
mask. any possible electrostatic charges.
Battery (vehicle) 311
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
battery could explode if touched due to You can then no longer move the vehicle.
electrostatic charge or due to spark The battery and the cover of the positive
formation. terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
H Environmental note In order for the battery to achieve the
Batteries contain dangerous maximum possible service life, it must always
substances. It is against the be sufficiently charged.
law to dispose of them with The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
the household rubbish. They discharge over time if you do not use the
must be collected separately vehicle. In this case, have the battery
and recycled to protect the disconnected at a qualified specialist
environment. workshop. You can also charge the battery
Dispose of batteries in an
with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
environmentally friendly Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
manner. Take discharged for further information.
batteries to a qualified Have the battery charge level checked more
specialist workshop or a frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
special collection point for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for
used batteries. a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
! Have the battery checked regularly at a parked for a long period of time.
Observe the service intervals in the i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified vehicle and do not require any electrical
specialist workshop for more information. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
! You should have all work involving the power.
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is i If the power supply has been interrupted,
necessary for you to disconnect the battery e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
yourself, make sure that: have to:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the Rset the clock. Information on setting the
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, clock can be found in the separate
ensure that the ignition is switched off. operating instructions.
Check that all the indicator lamps in the On vehicles with COMAND and a
instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, navigation system, the clock is set
electronic components, such as the automatically.
alternator, may be damaged. Rreset the function for folding the exterior
Ryou first remove the negative terminal mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
clamp and then the positive terminal the mirrors out once (Y page 116).
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The
Z
312 Battery (vehicle)
Charging the battery

G WARNING
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved
by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may
escape during charging and cause explosions
that may result in paint damage, corrosion or
personal injury.
A battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further

information and availability.
Charge the battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the battery charger.
G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns during the
charging process due to the gases which
escape from the battery. Do not lean over the
battery during the charging process.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.
! Only use battery chargers with a

maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 313).
Read the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.
X Open the hood (Y page 294).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 313).
Jump-starting 313
Jump-starting
G WARNING
Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
G WARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:

Rthe jumper leads are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the hood (Y page 294).
Z
314 Jump-starting
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your
own vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting 315
Towing and tow-starting transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey

back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
G WARNING 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
towing bar if: If the vehicle has to be towed more than
Rthe engine is not running. 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
Rthere is a brake system malfunction. raised and transported.
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
or the vehicle's electrical system. weight must not exceed the maximum
The power assistance for the steering and the permissible gross vehicle weight of your
brake force booster do not work when the vehicle.
engine is not running. You will need more Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
force to steer and brake, you may have to weight rating can be found on the vehicle
depress the brake pedal with maximum force. identification plate (Y page 361).
Before towing away, make sure that the It is better to have the vehicle transported
steering can be moved and is not locked. than to have it towed.
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its If the vehicle has suffered transmission
weight must not exceed the maximum damage, have it transported on a transporter
permissible gross vehicle weight of your or trailer.
vehicle. The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
G WARNING
The battery must be connected and charged.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
Otherwise, you:
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
vehicle is to be towed. the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the position N
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could Release the selector lever lock manually to
be damaged. move it out of position P(Y page 164).
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, (Y page 80). You could otherwise be locked
recover the vehicle with a crane. out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged. Installing/removing the towing eye
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Installing the towing eye
This could damage the vehicle.
G WARNING
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in particularly careful when removing the rear
the ignition lock and shift the automatic cover.
Z
316 Towing and tow-starting
Only possible on vehicles without

4MATIC.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 125).
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 315).
Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground
G WARNING
Example: Cabriolet, towing eye covers The power assistance for the steering and the
The mountings for the removable towing eyes brake force booster do not work when the
are located in the bumpers. They are at the engine is not running. You will then need
front and at the rear, under the covers. much more effort to brake and steer the
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle vehicle. Adapt your style of driving
tool kit (Y page 308). accordingly.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
It is important that you observe the safety
direction of the arrow. instructions when towing away your vehicle
X Take cover : off the opening. (Y page 315).
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
stop and tighten it. (Y page 125).
i When towing with the hazard warning
Removing the towing eye lamps switched on, use the combination
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. switch as usual to signal a change of
direction. In this case, only the turn signals
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press for the desired direction flash. When the
until it engages. combination switch is reset, the hazard
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. warning lamps start flashing again.
ignition lock.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
raised
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
! The ignition must be switched off if you X Shift the automatic transmission to
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle position N.
raised. Intervention by ESP® could X Release the brake pedal.
otherwise damage the brake system. X Release the parking brake.
Fuses 317
Transporting the vehicle Tow-starting (emergency starting)

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle must not be started by tow-starting. This
such as axle or steering components. could otherwise damage the transmission.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. You can find information on "Jump-starting"
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle at (Y page 313).
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Fuses
ignition lock. Important safety notes
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N. G WARNING
Only use fuses that have been approved for
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and that have the
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by correct fuse rating for the systems
applying the parking brake. concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
X Move the selector lever to position P. faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the approved or attempting to repair or bridge
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be
from the ignition lock. overloaded and result in a fire. Have the cause
X Secure the vehicle.
traced and rectified at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! Only use fuses that have been approved

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed have the correct fuse rating for the system
with either the front or the rear axle raised, concerned. Otherwise, components or
as doing so will damage the transmission. systems could be damaged.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
damage to the front or rear axle, have it faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
transported on a transporter or trailer. components on the circuit and their functions
In the event of damage to the electrical stop operating.
system Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
If the battery is defective, the automatic the same rating, which you can recognize by
transmission will be locked in position P. To the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
shift the automatic transmission to position in the fuse allocation chart.
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
electrical system in the same way as when cause traced and rectified at a qualified
jump-starting (Y page 313). specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Z
318 Fuses
Before changing a fuse

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 167).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
ignition lock and remove it (Y page 151).
or
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
the ignition is switched off (Y page 151).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the
must be off. bottom in the direction of arrow =.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of
RFuse box on the driver's side of the arrow ; and remove it.
dashboard
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
the dashboard.
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side

of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
of travel Fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuse allocation chart is located in the G WARNING
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
under the trunk floor (Y page 308).
switched off and that the SmartKey is
removed from the ignition lock before you
open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the
Dashboard fuse box
windshield wipers and the wiper rods above
! Do not use a pointed object such as a the cover could be set in motion. This could
screwdriver to open the cover in the lead to you or others being injured by the
dashboard. You could damage the wiper rods.
dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
the operation of the fuses.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Open the hood.
Fuses 319
X Remove any existing moisture from the Coupe

fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: turn rotary catch : of cover ;
X To open: remove lines ; from the guides. clockwise.
X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind X Open cover ; downwards.
connection = to do this.
X Open clamp :.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is

lying correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.
X Close the hood.
Cabriolet
X To open: raise trunk floor :(Y page 272).
X Using tabs =, push back floor covering
Fuse box in the trunk
with slits ; and lift it up.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
X Open the trunk lid.
Z
320
321

Operation ........................................... 322
Winter operation ............................... 324
Tire pressure ..................................... 325
Loading the vehicle .......................... 333
All about wheels and tires ............... 336
Changing a wheel ............................. 344
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 349
Emergency spare wheel ................... 355
Wheels and tires

322 Operation
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i This Operator's Manual describes all workshop and inquire about:
models and all standard and optional Rsuitability
equipment of your vehicle available at the Rlegal stipulations
time of publication of the Operator's Rfactory recommendations
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Information on the dimensions and types of
not be equipped with all features wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
described. This also applies to safety- under "Wheel/tire combinations"
related systems and functions. (Y page 349).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
i Read the information on qualified your vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
Important safety notes (Y page 333)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
G WARNING flap (Y page 165)

Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 325)
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
the wheel brakes or suspension components Rin the "Tire pressure" section
may be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original Operation
part (designation, manufacturer, model). Information on driving
G WARNING If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, pressures and correct them if necessary.
steering and braking characteristics of the While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
vehicle. There is a risk of accident. noises and unusual handling characteristics,
Tires without run-flat characteristics: e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or as possible to check the wheels and tires for
consult a qualified specialist workshop. damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Tires with run-flat characteristics: causing the unusual handling characteristics.
Rpay
If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
attention to the information and
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
workshop.
with run-flat characteristics).
When parking your vehicle, make sure that
Accessories that are not approved for your the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over
used correctly can impair the operating curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
safety. to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the
sidewalls, may be damaged.
Operation 323
Regular checking of wheels and tires Tire tread

G WARNING G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
accident. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage speed is not adapted to suit the driving
and replace any damaged tires immediately. conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your may exhibit different levels of wear at
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
well as after driving off-road or on rough should regularly check the tread depth and
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of the condition of the tread across the entire
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to width of all tires.
damage such as: Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rcuts in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rpunctures
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rtears in the tires
Wheels and tires

For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rbulges on tires
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels tire tread depth is reached.
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 323). If necessary, turn
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
into the tire tread.
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 325). Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
tread. They are visible once the tread depth
wheel (Y page 355).
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the
The service life of tires depends on the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
following factors amongst other things: replaced.
RDrivingstyle
RTirepressure
RDistance covered
Z
324 Winter operation
Selecting, mounting and replacing Winter operation

tires
General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
the wheels. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach
their full performance after this distance.
Driving with summer tires
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). tires lose elasticity significantly, and
RReplace the tires after six years at the
therefore traction and braking power as well.
Change the tires on your vehicle to
latest, regardless of wear.
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
Observe the notes on the emergency spare temperatures could cause cracks to form,
wheel (Y page 355). thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
Wheels and tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat M+S tires
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of G WARNING
pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss and do not provide sufficient traction. There
warning system or with an active tire pressure is a risk of an accident.
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
Mercedes-Benz. in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
a flat tire (Y page 309).
winter tires or all-weather tires. Both types of
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires tire are identified by the M+S marking.
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
factory. It is therefore recommended that symbol in addition to the M+S marking
you additionally equip your vehicle with a provide the best possible grip in wintry road
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not conditions.
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
Only these tires will allow driving safety
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
systems such as ABS and ESP® to function
optimally in winter. These tires have been
developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics.
Tire pressure 325
Always observe the maximum permissible If you intend to mount snow chains, please
speed specified for the M+S tires you have bear the following points in mind:
mounted. RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
Once the winter tires are mounted: wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 329). wheel-tire combinations (Y page 349).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire
pressure loss warning system roads completely covered by snow.
(Y page 329). Remove the snow chains as soon as
X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure
possible when you come to a road that is
not snow-covered.
monitor (Y page 330).
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
For more information on driving with the snow chains. Observe the appropriate
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 355). regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
Snow chains
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
G WARNING i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
If snow chains are installed to the front pulling away with snow chains installed
Wheels and tires

wheels, they may drag against the vehicle (Y page 67). This way you can allow the
body or chassis components. This could wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. achieving an increased driving force
There is a risk of an accident. (cutting action).
To avoid hazardous situations:
For more information on driving with the
Rnever install snow chains to the front emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 355).
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels. Tire pressure
! On some tire sizes there is not enough Tire pressure specifications

space for snow chains. To avoid damage to Important safety notes
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and G WARNING
wheels". Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish too high are associated with the following
to mount snow chains on steel wheels, hazards:
make sure that you remove the respective Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may heavily laden or when driven at high
otherwise be damaged. speeds.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
recommends that you only use snow chains unevenly, which can severely impair tire
that have been specially approved for your traction.
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a Rthe driving, steering and braking
corresponding standard of quality. characteristics may be severely impaired.
There is a risk of accident.
Z
326 Tire pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard
and check the pressure of all the tires contains the recommended tire pressures for
including the spare wheel: cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Rmonthly,
are valid for the maximum permissible load
at least
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
Rif the load changes speed.
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g. Tire pressure table
off-road driving
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. fuel filler flap.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire
pressure tables are examples. Tire
pressure specifications are vehicle-specific
and may deviate from the data shown here.
The tire pressure specifications that are
valid for your vehicle can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
General notes
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
The recommended tire pressures for the tires for this vehicle by the factory
mounted at the factory can be found on the The tire pressure table contains the
labels described here. recommended pressures for cold tires for
Operation with the emergency spare various operating conditions, i.e. differing
wheel (Y page 355). load and speed conditions.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
: Recommended tire pressures laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and
The Tire and Loading Information placard is amounts of luggage. The actual number of
on the B-pillar on the driver's side seats may differ.
(Y page 333).
Tire pressure 327
If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
and can be found on the tire sidewall
(Y page 338). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
If the tire pressures have been set to the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower does not permit any reliable conclusion about
road speeds, the pressures should be reset the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
to the higher values:
Wheels and tires

the electronic tire pressure monitoring
Rif you want to drive with an increased load system, the tire pressure can be checked
and/or using the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is
i The tire pressures for increased loads dependent on the driving speed and the load.
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
Therefore, you should only correct tire
tire pressure table, may have a negative
pressures when the tires are cold.
effect on driving comfort.
The tires are cold:
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
Rif the vehicle has been parked without
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure. direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
For more information, contact a qualified
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The tire temperature changes depending on
Important notes on tire pressure the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
G WARNING changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire 1.5 psi). Take this into account when
pressure that is too low may result in a tire checking the pressure of warm tires. Only
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. current operating conditions. If you check the
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
valve is leaking. resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
Z
328 Tire pressure
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be Overinflated tires may:

too low. Rincrease the braking distance
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rhave an adverse effect on handling
cold tires: characteristics
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rwear quickly and unevenly
on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rinthe tire pressure table on the inside of Rbe more susceptible to damage
the fuel filler flap
Ron the yellow label on the emergency spare
Maximum tire pressures
wheel (depending on the vehicle
equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
Wheels and tires
overheat and burst as a consequence. In

addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair : Example: maximum permissible tire
the braking properties and the driving pressure
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the inflation pressure. Always observe the
tires, including the spare wheel. recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
Underinflated tires may: (Y page 325).
Roverheat, leading to tire defects
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
Rhave an adverse effect on handling specific and may deviate from the values in
characteristics the illustration.
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Checking the tire pressures
Overinflation
G WARNING Observe the notes on tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst (Y page 325).
because they are damaged more easily by Information on air pressure for the tires on
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they your vehicle can be found:
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an Information placard on the B-pillar
accident. (Y page 333)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel. flap (Y page 165)
Tire pressure 329
Rin the "Tire pressure" section cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 325) warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
Checking tire pressures manually you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
To determine and set the correct tire event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
pressure, proceed as follows: vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to abrupt steering maneuvers.
be checked. The function of the tire pressure loss warning
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto system is limited or delayed if:
the valve. Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with tires.
the recommended value on the Tire and Rroad conditions are wintry.
Loading Information placard (Y page 325).
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
the recommended value.
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
high rates of acceleration).
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
Wheels and tires

check the tire pressure again using the tire vehicle or on the roof).
pressure gauge.
Restarting the tire pressure loss
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
warning system
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Tire pressure loss warning system Rchanged the tire pressure
(Canada only) Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
pressure loss warning system monitors the
for the respective operating conditions.
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect The recommended tire pressures can be
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed found on the Tire and Loading Information
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
message will appear in the multifunction flap. The tire pressure loss warning system
display. can only give reliable warnings if you have
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect
The tire pressure warning system does not
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
will be monitored.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressure (Y page 325).
pressures (Y page 325).
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace the need to regularly check your
vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of position 2 (Y page 151) in the ignition lock.
pressure on several tires at the same time
Z
330 Tire pressure
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size
to select the Serv. menu. than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
X Press the 9 or : button to select Information placard or the tire pressure label,
Tire Pressure. you should determine the proper tire pressure
X Press the a button. for those tires.
The Run Flat Indicator Active As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Press OK to Restart message appears been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
in the multifunction display. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
If you wish to confirm the restart: tires are significantly underinflated.
X Press the a button. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
appears in the multifunction display. your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
X Press the 9 or : button to select them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
Yes.
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
message appears in the multifunction handling and stopping ability.
display.
Wheels and tires
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
loss warning system will monitor the set driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
tire pressures of all four tires. pressure, even if underinflation has not
If you wish to cancel the restart: reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
X Press the % button.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
or TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
X When the Tire Pressure Now OK? system is not operating properly. The TPMS
message appears, press the 9 malfunction indicator is combined with the
or : button to select Cancel. low tire pressure telltale. When the system
X Press the a button. detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
The tire pressure values stored at the last flash for approximately a minute and then
restart will continue to be monitored. remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
Tire pressure monitor (USA only) exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
Important safety notes the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
G WARNING malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reasons, including the installation of
should be checked at least once a month incompatible replacement or alternate tires
when cold and inflated to the pressure or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS from functioning properly. Always
on the Tire and Loading Information placard check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
Tire pressure 331
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to significantly too low. The tire pressure
continue to function properly. monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire minute and then remains lit constantly, the
pressure to that recommended for cold tires tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
which is suitable for the operating situation Information on tire pressures is displayed in
(Y page 325). Note that the correct tire the multifunction display. After a few minutes
pressure for the current operating situation of driving, the current tire pressure of each
must first be taught-in to the tire pressure tire is shown in the multifunction display.
monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
pressure, the warning threshold for the
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire
warning message is aligned to the reference
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
minute and then remaining lit. When the
cold tires (Y page 332). The current
malfunction has been rectified, the tire
pressures are saved as new reference values.
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few
As a result, a warning message will appear if
minutes of driving.
the tire pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
board computer may differ from those
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
Wheels and tires

measured at a gas station with a pressure
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
(Y page 325).
board computer refer to those measured at
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the values indicated by a pressure gauge are
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the higher than those shown by the on-board
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid pressures.
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
If a tire pressure monitor system is installed, be affected by interference from radio
the vehicle's wheels have sensors installed transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. headphones, two-way radios) that may be
The tire pressure monitor warns you if the being operated in or near the vehicle.
pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The
tire pressure monitor only functions if the i This device complies with part 15 of the
correct sensors are installed on all wheels. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow following two conditions:
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for 1. This device may not cause interference,
indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. and
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up 2. this device must accept any interference
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or received, including interference that may
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: cause undesired operation of the device.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the Any unauthorized modification to this
tire pressure on one or more tires is device could void the user's authority to
Z
332 Tire pressure
Checking tire pressure electronically the tire pressure on all four wheels and
correct it if necessary.
position 2 (Y page 151) in the ignition lock. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
X Press the = or ; button on the interchanged, the tire pressures may be
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. displayed for the wrong positions for a
X Press the 9 or : button to select short time. This is rectified after a few
Tire Pressure. minutes of driving, and the tire pressures
are displayed for the correct positions.
X Press button a.
The current tire pressure for each wheel will
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
be displayed in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than When you restart the tire pressure monitor,
20 minutes the Tire pressures will be all existing warning messages are deleted and
displayed after driving a few the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
minutes message is shown. the currently set tire pressures as the
reference values for monitoring. In most
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure cases, the tire pressure monitor will
monitor automatically recognizes new wheels automatically detect the new reference
or new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tire values after you have changed the tire
pressure values to the individual wheels is not
Wheels and tires
pressure. However, you can also define

possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor reference values manually as described here.
Active message is shown instead of the tire The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
pressure display. The tire pressures are new tire pressure values.
already being monitored.
X Set the tire pressure to the value
i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, recommended for the corresponding
the system may continue to show the tire driving situation on the Tire and Loading
pressure of the wheel that has been Information placard on the driver's side
removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, B-pillar (Y page 325).
note that the value displayed for the Additional tire pressure values for different
position where the spare wheel is mounted loads can also be found on the tire pressure
is not the same as the current tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
of the emergency spare wheel. (Y page 325).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
Tire pressure monitor warning on all four wheels.
messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a 2 in the ignition lock.
significant pressure loss on one or more tires, X Press the = or ; button on the
a warning message is shown in the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
multifunction display. A warning tone also
sounds and the tire pressure warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster. Tire Pressure.
Each tire that is affected by a significant loss
of pressure is highlighted in the pressure The multifunction display shows the
display. current tire pressure for each tire or the
Tire pressures will be displayed
X If the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, check
Loading the vehicle 333
after driving a few minutes corresponding pressures for tires

message. installed at the factory.
X Press the : button. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
The multifunction display shows the Use B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
Current Pressures as New Reference identification plate informs you of the
Values message. gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
If you wish to confirm the restart:
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
X Press the a button. can also find information about the
The Tire Pressure Monitor maximum gross axle weight rating on the
Restarted message appears in the front and rear axle.
multifunction display. The maximum gross axle weight rating is
After driving for a few minutes, the system the maximum weight that can be carried
checks whether the current tire pressures by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
are within the specified range. The new tire exceed the maximum load or the
pressures are then accepted as reference maximum gross axle weight rating for the
values and monitored. front or rear axle.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Wheels and tires

Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a B-pillar (example: Coupe)
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the : B-pillar, driver's side
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load Maximum permissible gross vehicle
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of weight rating
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show

the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
details of the tire sizes and
Z
334 Loading the vehicle
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Determining the correct load limit
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight Step-by-step instructions
of occupants and cargo should never The following steps have been developed as
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
load and luggage must not exceed the pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
specified value. Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the combined weight of occupants and cargo
illustration are examples. The maximum should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
permissible gross vehicle weight rating is your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
vehicle-specific and may differ from that in placard.
the illustration. You can find the valid X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight the driver and passengers that will be riding
rating for your vehicle on the Tire and in your vehicle.
Loading Information placard. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
Wheels and tires
Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example: at a sum “XXX” of
1400 lbs and five occupants each weighing
150 lbs, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Loading the vehicle 335
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (Y page 333).
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants and
cargo (data from the Tire
and Loading Information
placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires

Number of 5 3 1
people in the
vehicle (driver
and
occupants)
Distribution of Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
the occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1:
occupants (68 kg) (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
of all
occupants
Z
336 All about wheels and tires
Step 3

Permissible 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
load Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) = Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
(maximum 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
gross vehicle
weight rating
from the Tire
and Loading
Information
placard
minus the
gross weight
of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires
Even if you have calculated the total load Uniform Tire Quality Grading
carefully, you should still make sure that the Standards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading
be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 333).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data.
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear
grade, ; traction grade and = temperature
grade. These regulations do not apply to
Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North
America are provided with the corresponding
All about wheels and tires 337
quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
the tire. measured under controlled conditions on
Where applicable, the tire grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
information can be found on the tire sidewall and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
between the tread shoulder and maximum traction performance.
tire width. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
Example: road is always lower than on dry road
RTreadwear
surfaces.
grade: 200
You should pay special attention to road
RTraction grade: AA
conditions when temperatures are around
RTemperature grade: A
freezing point.
All passenger car tires must conform to the Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
statutory safety requirements in addition to tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
these grades. tires. Observe the legally required minimum
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire tread depth (Y page 323). Winter tires can
specific and may deviate from the values in reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
the illustration. surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than
Treadwear on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
Wheels and tires

snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Further information on winter tires (M+S
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tires) (Y page 324).
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
Temperature
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a G WARNING
tire graded 100. The temperature grade for this tire is
The relative performance of tires depends established for a tire that is properly inflated
upon the actual conditions of their use, and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
however, and may depart significantly from underinflation, or excessive loading, either
the norm, due to variations in driving habits, separately or in combination, can cause
service practices and differences in road excessive heat build-up and possible tire
characteristics and climate conditions. failure.
Traction The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C. These represent the tire's
G WARNING resistance to the generation of heat and its
The traction grade assigned to this tire is ability to dissipate heat when tested under
based on straight-ahead braking traction controlled conditions on a specified indoor
tests, and does not include acceleration, laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature can cause the material of the tire
characteristics. to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
to the drive train. of performance which all passenger car tires
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
Z
represent higher levels of performance on the Tire size designation, load-bearing

laboratory test wheel than the minimum capacity and speed rating
required by law.
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing
Tire labeling capacity and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.
Overview There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Wheels and tires
: Tire width
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 342) ; Nominal aspect ratio in %
; DOT, Tire Identification Number = Tire code
(Y page 341) ? Rim diameter
= Maximum tire load (Y page 340) A Load bearing index
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 328) B Speed rating
A Manufacturer General: depending on the manufacturer's
B Tire material (Y page 341) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
C Tire size designation, load-bearing may not contain any letters or may contain
capacity and speed index (Y page 338) one letter that precedes the size description.
D Load index (Y page 340) If there is no letter preceding the size
E Tire name description (as shown above): these are
passenger vehicle tires according to
The markings described above are on the tire European manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
designation) and the manufacturer's name.
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards.
deviate from the data in the example. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an adapt your driving style to the traffic
emergency. conditions.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal Summer tires
tire width in millimeters.
Index Speed rating
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and tire Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
the tire height. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
T up to 118mph (190 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial H up to 130mph (210 km/h)
tires.
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR” W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
in the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)
Wheels and tires

diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified in inches (in). ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR”
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the in the size description, depending on the
specified load limit. The maximum manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
permissible load can be found on the The service specification is made up of
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information load-bearing index A and speed rating
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side B.
(Y page 333). RIf the size description of your tire includes
Example: "ZR" and there are no service
The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to a specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the order to find out the maximum speed.
tire can carry. For further information on the If a service specification is available, the
maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see maximum speed is limited according to the
(Y page 340). speed rating in the service specification.
For further information on the load bearing Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this
index, see "Load index" (Y page 340). example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the The letter "Y" represents the speed rating
approved maximum speed of the tire. and the maximum speed of the tire is
limited to 186 mph (300km/h).
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
REvery tire that has a maximum speed of
deviate from the data in the example.
more than 186 mph (300 km/h) must have
Regardless of the speed rating, always a "ZR" in the size description and the
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and service specification must be given in
Z
parentheses. Example: Load index

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating

Q M+S3 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S3 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

up to 130mph (210 km/h) In addition to the load bearing index, load
H M+S3
index : may be imprinted after the letters
V M+S3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) that identify speed index B on the sidewall
of the tire (Y page 338).
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
the driving characteristics of winter tires. example above), represents a standard
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires load (SL) tire
Wheels and tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill tire
the requirements of the Rubber RLight Load: represents a light load tire
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RC, D, E: represents a load range that
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) depends on the maximum load that the tire
regarding the tire traction on snow. They can carry at a certain pressure
have been especially developed for driving
on snow. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph
(210km/h). Maximum load rating
The speed rating of tires mounted at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 349).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
3 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as a code to describe
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
(Y page 333).
A provides information about the age of a
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent
specific and may deviate from the values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire
2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or
retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and
other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire
possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in
the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used
of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number
Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Bar
For further information about retreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure.
see (Y page 322). 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
Z
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
1 bar. the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire
the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for
Transportation. which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The number of occupants for which the The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
vehicle is designed multiplied by of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
68 kilograms (150 lb). wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
A uniform standard to grade the quality of exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction as specified on the vehicle identification plate
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
Wheels and tires
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of

Recommended tire pressure the vehicle including all accessories,
The recommended tire pressure applies to occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
the tires mounted at the factory. noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard weight rating is specified on the vehicle
contains the recommended tire pressures for identification plate on the B-pillar on the
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the driver's side.
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for The maximum weight is the sum of:
various operating conditions, i.e. differing Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
load and speed conditions. Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
This is the combined weight of all standard equipment

and optional equipment available for the Kilopascal (kPa)
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
installed on the vehicle or not.
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
Rim pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire (kPa) to 1 bar.
is mounted. Load index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
rating. The actual load on an axle must never of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The capacity more precisely.
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Curb weight Tread

The weight of a vehicle with standard The part of the tire that comes into contact
equipment including the maximum capacity with the road.
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
conditioning system and optional equipment Bead
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
not include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum load rating coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for Sidewall
which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one Weight of optional extras
tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated These optional extras, such as high-
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
Wheels and tires

by two. or a high-performance battery, are not
included in the curb weight and the weight of
PSI (pounds per square inch) the accessories.
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Aspect ratio This is a unique identifier which can be used
Relationship between tire height and tire by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
width in percent. example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
Tire pressure
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
This is pressure inside the tire applying an type code and the manufacturing date.
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in Load bearing index
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal The load bearing index (also load index) is a
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only code that contains the maximum load bearing
be corrected when the tires are cold. capacity of a tire.
Cold tire pressure Traction
The tires are cold: Traction is the result of friction between the
Rif the vehicle has been parked without tires and the road surface.
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
Treadwear indicators
hours and
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
1 mile (1.6 km).
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Z
344 Changing a wheel
Occupant distribution Always observe the instructions and safety

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
their designated seating positions. (Y page 345).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Total load limit differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
number of seats in the vehicle. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Changing a wheel can rotate the wheels according to the
Flat tire intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
You can find information on what to do in the available, the tires should then be replaced
event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
assistance" section (Y page 308). 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires
Instructions for driving with MOExtended this. Do not change the direction of wheel
tires in the event of a flat tire are also provided rotation.
there.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
Wheels and tires
The "Breakdown assistance" section the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
(Y page 308) contains information and notes is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,
on how to deal with a flat tire. Instructions for if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
a flat tire are also provided there.
Direction of rotation
Interchanging the wheels
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
G WARNING have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
severely impair the driving characteristics if benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. maintained.
The wheel brakes or suspension components An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
may also be damaged. There is a risk of its correct direction of rotation.
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions. Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
monitor, electronic components are
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the Cleaning the wheels
electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified G WARNING
specialist workshop. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Changing a wheel 345
to the tires or chassis components. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

Components damaged in this way may fail rolling away
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery and
level ground. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 308).
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position. The folding wheel chock is an additional
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
Wheels and tires

X Switch off the engine. wheel.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove X Fold both plates upwards :.
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0, the openings in base plate =.
which is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 151).
X If included in the vehicle equipment, take
the tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle on level ground (example:

Coupe)
X On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Z
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
(example: Coupe) objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
X
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
On light downhill gradients: place
bearing capacity due to the restricted
chocks or other suitable items in front of
height.
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Rthe maximum clearance between the
underside of the tire and the ground must
Raising the vehicle be 1.2 in (3 cm).
G WARNING Rnever place your hands and feet under the
Wheels and tires
If you do not position the jack correctly at the raised vehicle.

appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
There is a risk of injury. raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the when the vehicle is raised.
jack must be positioned vertically, directly Rmake sure that no persons are present in
under the jacking point of the vehicle. the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel the wheel you wish to change by about one
is being changed. It is not suited for full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
performing maintenance work under the completely.
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Changing a wheel 347
Jacking points for the jack (example: Coupe) Example

The jacking points are located just behind the X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
front wheel housings and just in front of the beneath the jacking point.
rear wheel housings (arrows). X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect completely on jacking point = and the
the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers next
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
to the jacking points on the outer sills.
X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Wheels and tires

Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold

cover ; upwards.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt

completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.
X Remove the wheel.
Z
Mounting a new wheel X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
G WARNING X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged alignment bolt and push it on.
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
finger-tight.
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
accident.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified tight.
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads Lowering the vehicle
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
over. There is a risk of injury. Have the tightening torque immediately
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
Wheels and tires
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub Tightening wheel bolts (example: vehicle with
emergency spare wheel)
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-
clockwise until the vehicle is once again
standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with
emergency spare wheel)
Wheel and tire combinations 349
X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the Information on tires, wheels and approved
cover into the outer sill. combinations can be obtained from any
X Check the tire pressure of the newly qualified specialist workshop.
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Overview of abbreviations used in the
Observe the recommended tire pressure following tire tables:
(Y page 325). RBA: both axles
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all RFA: front axle
wheels mounted must be equipped with RRA: rear axle
functioning sensors. The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheel and tire combinations
with the recommended tire pressures on
General notes the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and the fuel filler flap
wheels which have been approved by Observe the notes on recommended tire
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your pressures under various operating conditions
vehicle. (Y page 325).
Wheels and tires

These tires have been specially adapted for Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
use with the control systems, such as ABS the tires are cold. Comply with the
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
equip the vehicle with:
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
right)
certain AMG tires)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
may only be used on wheels that have been
tires)
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
is therefore recommended that you
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
affected. In addition, when driving with a
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
load, tire dimension variations could cause
workshop.
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. available at the factory for all countries.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for i On the following pages, you can find
damage resulting from the use of tires, information on approved wheel rims and
wheels or accessories other than those tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
tested and approved. winter tires. Winter tires are not available
Z
350 Wheel and tire combinations
at the factory as standard equipment or

optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in
certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
Wheels and tires
Tires
E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
Summer tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/45 R17 94 W MOExtended4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
RA: 255/40 R17 94 W MOExtended4, 5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
Wheels and tires

RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+S FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
RA: 255/40 R17 94 H M+S5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
4 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

Summer tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/45 R17 94 W MOExtended4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
RA: 255/40 R17 94 W MOExtended4, 5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
4 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+S FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

RA: 255/40 R17 94 H M+S5 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Z
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires

RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Emergency spare wheel 355
Winter tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Emergency spare wheel is found on the wheel or under "Technical

data" (Y page 357).
Important safety notes An emergency spare wheel may also be
G WARNING mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
the speed limitation specified on the
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
emergency spare wheel.
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
severely impair the driving characteristics. regardless of wear. This also applies to the
There is a risk of an accident. emergency spare wheel.
Wheels and tires

To avoid hazardous situations: i When you are driving with the collapsible
Radapt your driving style accordingly and spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
drive carefully. loss warning system or the tire pressure
Rnever install more than one spare wheel or
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
system/the tire pressure monitor when the
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
wheel of a different size briefly. new wheel.
Rdo not switch ESP® off. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
wheel of a different size replaced at the the system may still display the tire
nearest qualified specialist workshop. pressure of the removed wheel for a few
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions minutes. The value displayed for the
as well as the tire type must be correct. mounted emergency spare wheel is not the
same as the current tire pressure of the
When using an emergency spare wheel or emergency spare wheel.
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on
emergency spare wheels.
General notes
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as
necessary (Y page 325). The applicable value
Z
356 Emergency spare wheel
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

; Stowage well
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can
be found in the stowage well under the trunk
floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 272).
Wheels and tires
X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise

and remove it.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel :.
For further information on changing a wheel
and installing the spare wheel, see
(Y page 308).
Emergency spare wheel 357
Technical data
Tires Alloy wheels

T 135/80 R17 103 M 3.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.77 in (19.5 mm)
T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)
E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

Tires Alloy wheels

T 135/80 R17 103 M 3.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.77 in (19.5 mm)
Wheels and tires

T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2
Tires Alloy wheels

T 125/70 R18 99 M 3,5 B x 18 H2 ET
Z
358
359

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 360
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 360
Warranty ............................................ 360
Identification plates ......................... 361
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 362
Vehicle data ...................................... 367
Technical data
360 Warranty
Useful information ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning

Devices, as well as control units and
i This Operator's Manual describes all sensors for these restraint systems, may be
models and all standard and optional installed in the following areas of your
equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicle:
time of publication of the Operator's Rdoors
Manual. Country-specific differences are Rdoor pillars
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rdoor sills
Rseats
related systems and functions. Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
i Read the information on qualified
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
Information regarding technical data repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint
i The data stated here specifically refers to systems.
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult Have aftermarket accessories installed at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for a qualified specialist workshop.
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
levels.
strict quality control. Each part has been
Technical data
specially developed, manufactured or

selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
fine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-
Benz parts should therefore be used.
G WARNING More than 300,000 different genuine
Driving safety may be impaired if non- Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
approved parts, tires and wheels or safety- Mercedes-Benz models.
relevant accessories are used.
All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply
This could lead to malfunctions in safety- of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This necessary service and repair work. In
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle addition, strategically located parts delivery
and cause an accident. centers provide quick and reliable parts
For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends service.
that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or Always specify the vehicle identification
parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels number (VIN) (Y page 361) and the engine
and accessories that have been specifically number (Y page 362) when ordering genuine
approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz parts.
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major Warranty
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new warranties printed in the Service and
parts. Warranty Information booklet.
Identification plates 361
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

replace and repair all factory-installed parts
in accordance with the following warranty
terms and conditions:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties. These are available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If you lose the Service and Warranty
Information booklet, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
Technical data
; VIN
Identification plates = Paint code
Vehicle identification plate with i The data shown on the vehicle
vehicle identification number (VIN) identification plate is used only as an
example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's
identification plate.
VIN
X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Z
362 Service products and filling capacities
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its For health reasons, you should prevent
rearmost position. service fluids from coming into direct contact
X Slightly raise front floor covering = and with your skin or clothing.
fold floor covering flap : upwards. If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
You will see VIN ;. physician immediately.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations: H Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an
Ron the lower edge of windshield environmentally responsible manner.
(Y page 362)
Ron the vehicle identification plate Service products include the following:
(Y page 361) RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
Engine number
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use
products that have been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data
Information on tested and approved products

can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
: Emission control information plate,
including the certification of both federal You can recognize service products approved
and Californian emissions standards by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
; Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations
indicate a level of quality or a specification in
Service products and filling accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
capacities MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
Fuel
to handling, storing and disposing of service Important safety notes
fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger
persons or the environment. G WARNING
Keep service fluids out of the reach of Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
children. It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Service products and filling capacities 363
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking If there is no premium-grade unleaded

materials near gasoline. gasoline available and regular unleaded
Turn off the engine before refueling. gasoline must be used, please observe the
following precautions:
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
contact. regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
Direct skin contact with fuels and the with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your as soon as possible.
health. Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration.
Tank capacity Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do not
Model Total allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.
capacity Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being
All models 17.4 US gal operated in mountainous terrain, do not

(66.0 l) depress the accelerator pedal further
than Ô of the pedal travel.
Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded
Model Of which gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.
reserve
Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or
All models Approx. unleaded gasoline with additives can be used.
2.1 US gal The concentration of additives in the fuel,
Technical data
(8.0 l) however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:
REthanol
Gasoline RTAME
RETBE
Fuel grade
RIPA
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
RTBA
gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel For MTBE, the concentration should not
system and engine. exceed 15%.
! You should only refuel with unleaded The concentration of methanol in gasoline,
premium-grade gasoline as this avoids including other additives, must not exceed
damaging the catalytic converter. 3%.
If engine running problems are apparent, Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
have the cause checked immediately and permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol
repaired. Excess unburned fuel can and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.
otherwise enter the catalytic converter, All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel
leading to overheating and possibly requirements, e.g.:
causing a fire. Rknock resistance
! To ensure the longevity and full Rboiling point
performance of the engine, only premium- Rvapor pressure
grade unleaded gasoline may be used. You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
Z
label on the pump, ask the staff for Flexible Fuel vehicles
assistance.
i For further information, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on G WARNING
the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com E85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours are
(USA only). poisonous, highly flammable and highly
combustible. E85 fuel can cause serious
Information on refueling (Y page 165).
injury if ignited, if you come into contact with
Additives it you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoid
! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do inhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skin
not use fuel additives that are not tested contact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any open
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. flames before refueling. Keep sparks away
Damage to or malfunctions of the fuel from E85 fuel, and do not smoke.
system may otherwise occur. Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the
One of the main problems of poor fuel quality following fuel types:
is the forming of deposits that are created Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline
during the gasoline combustion process.
RE85 fuel
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
branded fuels that have additives.
If you use fuels without these additives over unleaded gasoline
a longer period of time, carbon deposits may i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
build up. These deposits form at the inlet by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
Technical data
valves and in the combustion chamber in inside of the fuel filler flap.
particular.
Fuel consumption
This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:
The energy content of E85 fuel is less than
Rlonger engine warm-up phase that of the same amount of premium-grade
Runeven idle gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when
Rengine noise operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is
Rmisfiring therefore higher than with premium-grade
Rloss of power gasoline.
Carbon deposits may form if the availability Maintenance
of gasoline with relevant additives is Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz
insufficient (in certain regions). In this case, Center that you are operating or have
Mercedes-Benz recommends additives operated the vehicle with E85 fuel.
approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;
see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Low outside temperatures
For a list of approved products, consult an The starting procedure may take much longer
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply when operating the vehicle with E85 fuel at
with the instructions for use on the product outside temperatures below 32 ‡ (0 †).
label. E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside
Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This temperatures below -4 ‡ (-20 †).
causes unnecessary costs and could damage
the engine.
Service products and filling capacities 365
Engine oil Model Capacity

General notes E 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a BlueEFFICIENCY
specification other than is necessary to E 350 4MATIC
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do BlueEFFICIENCY
not change the engine oil or oil filter in E 550 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
order to achieve longer replacement BlueEFFICIENCY
intervals than those prescribed. You could
otherwise cause engine damage or damage
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Additives
Follow the instructions in the service ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
interval display regarding the oil change. This could damage the engine.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Engine oil viscosity
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
Technical data
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle. Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
Model Engine MB this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
model Approval means that it is thin.
E 350 276 229.5 Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)
BlueEFFICIENCY classification suitable for the prevailing
E 350 4MATIC outside temperatures. The table shows you
BlueEFFICIENCY which SAE classifications are to be used. The
low-temperature characteristics of engine
E 550 278 229.5 oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a
BlueEFFICIENCY result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is
therefore strongly recommended that you
i MB approval is indicated on the oil carry out regular oil changes using an
containers. approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE
classification.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Z
Brake fluid http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or

contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
even in countries where high temperatures
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling
prevail.
point.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
overheating.
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This would impair braking The coolant is a mixture of water and
efficiency. antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
You should have the brake fluid renewed at the following tasks:
regular intervals. The brake fluid change Rcorrosion protection
intervals can be found in the Maintenance Rantifreeze protection
Booklet. Rraising the boiling point
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
Information about approved brake fluid can coolant during operation is approximately
be obtained at any qualified specialist 266 ‡ (130 †).
workshop or on the Internet at The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at
Technical data
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Coolant Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
Important safety notes will not be dissipated as effectively.
G WARNING If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, open
inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an
flames and smoking are prohibited when
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
handling antifreeze.
accordance with MB Specifications for
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot Service Products 310.1.
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
The coolant is checked with every
yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot
maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
engine parts.
workshop.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
with the desired antifreeze protection. You filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
could otherwise damage the engine. adequate antifreeze and corrosion
Further information on coolants can be protection.
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
Vehicle data 367
Filling capacities Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

Missing values were not available at time of At temperatures below freezing:
going to print. X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
Model Capacity MB WinterFit.
E 350 Approx. 10.1 US qt Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
BlueEFFICIENCY (9.6 l) temperature.
E 350 4MATIC RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
BlueEFFICIENCY WinterFit with 2 parts water.
E 550 RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
BlueEFFICIENCY WinterFit with 1 part water.

RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion WinterFit with 1 part water.

inhibitor/antifreeze. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Windshield/headlamp cleaning
system
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
G WARNING
E 350 3.7 US qt (3.5 l)
Technical data
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
BlueEFFICIENCY
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may E 350 4MATIC
ignite and burn. You could be seriously BlueEFFICIENCY
burned. E 550 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
BlueEFFICIENCY
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
Vehicle data
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps. General notes
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to Please note that for the specified vehicle
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the data:
level sensor may be damaged. Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit of:
washer fluid should be mixed together. The - Tires
spray nozzles may otherwise become - Load
blocked.
- Condition of the suspension
At temperatures above freezing: - Optional equipment
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture Rthe vehicle length specified includes the
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. front license plate adapter.
MB SummerFit.
Z
368 Vehicle data
Dimensions and weights All models

Maximum roof 220 lb (100 kg)
load, Coupe only
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
E 350
BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle length 185.2 in (4703 mm)
Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1397 mm)
Model : Opening height
Coupe
E 350 66.2 in Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1398 mm)
BlueEFFICIENCY, (1682 mm) Cabriolet
Coupe
E 350 4MATIC Turning radius, 35.9 ft (10.95 m)
BlueEFFICIENCY, Coupe
Coupe Turning radius, 36.1 ft (11.00 m)
E 350 61.2 in Cabriolet
BlueEFFICIENCY, (1555 mm)
Technical data
Cabriolet
E 350 4MATIC
E 550 66.0 in BlueEFFICIENCY
BlueEFFICIENCY, (1676 mm) Vehicle length 185.2 in (4703 mm)
Coupe
Vehicle height 55.0 in (1397 mm)
E 550 61.1 in
BlueEFFICIENCY, (1553 mm) Turning radius 35.9 ft (10.95 m)
Cabriolet
E 550
Missing values were not available at time of BlueEFFICIENCY
going to print.
Vehicle length 185.9 in (4722 mm)
All models
Vehicle height, 54.9 in (1395 mm)
Vehicle width 79.3 in (2015 mm) Coupe
including exterior
mirrors Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1397 mm)
Cabriolet
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)
Turning radius 36.7 ft (11.20 m)
Vehicle height
when opening/
closing the roof,
Cabriolet
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz

vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this
Operator's Manual to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,

without written permission of Daimler AG.
As at 09.01.2012
É2075844281tËÍ
2075844281
Order no. 6515 3748 13 Part no. 207 584 42 81 Edition A 2013

Mercedes-Benz-CLASE-E 2013 en US

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Mercedes-Benz-CLASE-E 2013 en US

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

E-Class

Coupe and Cabriolet

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 37

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 105

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119

Climate control ................................. 135

Driving and parking .......................... 149

On-board computer and displays .... 211

Stowage and features ...................... 267

Maintenance and care ...................... 293

Breakdown assistance ..................... 307

Wheels and tires ............................... 321

Technical data ................................... 359

1, 2, 3 ... PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

ATTENTION ASSIST BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

E Switching off .................................. 168

Switching the surround lighting Remote vehicle locking .................. 283

N Telephone menu ............................ 220

PARKTRONIC Rear compartment

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22 Folding the backrests forward/

SmartKey SRS (Supplemental Restraint

Tank content Display message ............................ 248

Maximum load on a tire Towing away

V PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

Product information Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard

Printed Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation

Information for customers in Maintenance

If you have purchased a used car, please send Operating safety

Declarations of conformity Do not attach any equipment or cables in the

Do not connect any equipment to the on- modifications

again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or Limited Warranty

Information on copyright redistribution. Redistributions and use in

Function Page Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 38

Useful information 1. This device may not cause interference,

time of publication of the Operator's Any unauthorized modification to this

Introduction SRS functions are checked regularly when

the door. These items may be thrown

Air bags As the air bag inflates with considerable

Operator's Manual. are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a

Head bags fastened, regardless of whether the front-

Pelvis air bags

as a young teenager or a small adult), the Regardless of seating position, children 12

bag is deactivated. Should the 45 cause the passenger's weight to be lifted

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Roll bar (Cabriolet) deployed, or they can prevent this completely.

restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to G WARNING

! Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats when resetting

Seat belts G WARNING